of Genext Steels Private Limitedenvironmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/EIA/... · study, review of Greenbelt development requirement of the project-suggestion for species, type

Final Environmental Impact Assessment Report

&

Environment Management Plan

for

Proposed Steel Plant Plant Configuration - Pellet Plant (800 TPD), DRI (600 TPD), Induction

Furnace (1000 TPD), Rolling Mill (975 TPD) & Captive Power Plant (12 MW))

at

Survey Nos. 661, 662, 664, 665, 1822 & 1823, Village: Bagodara,

Tehsil: Bavla, District: Ahmedabad, Gujarat

of

Genext Steels Private Limited

Project or Activity: 3(a), Category: A

[ToR Letter No: F. No. J-11011/501/2017 -IA.II(I), dated 19.06.2018]

Baseline Study Period: January, 2018 to March, 2018

Prepared by

San Envirotech Pvt.

Ltd. 424, Medicine Market,

Paldi Cross Road,

Ahmedabad-380006 Gujarat

Email: [email protected]

Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited

1st Floor, SCO 20-21, Nr. Hotel

Dolphin, Dhakoli, Zirakpur-140604,

Punjab

Email: [email protected]

(January, 2019)

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]

Declaration by experts contributing to the EIA of Genext Steels Private

Limited

We, hereby, certify that we were a part of the EIA team in the following

capacity that developed the above EIA.

EIA Coordinator:

Name: Dr. D M

Dharmadhikari

Dr. Mahendra Sadaria

Signature & Date:

Period of

involvement

Dec, 2017 to Apr, 2018 Dec, 2017 to Apr, 2018

Contact

Information:

01762-509496 079-26583077

Functional Area Experts

Functional

Areas

Name of the

Expert

Involvement

(Period and Task)

Signature &

date

Air Pollution

Monitoring &

Control (AP)

Dr. Mahendra

Sadaria

&

Ms. Daksha

Gupta

Period: Dec, 2017 to Apr, 2018

Task: Planning of meteorological

AAQM baseline monitoring, site

visit/ survey, select monitoring

locations, data verification &

approval, interpretation of baseline

condition of air environment.

Evaluation of results of Ambient Air

Quality Monitoring (AAQM).

Contribution in EIA documentation.

Air Quality

Modeling and

Prediction

(AQ)

Diti

Patel

&

Ms. Daksha

Gupta


Task: Meteorology file generation,

Air quality model (ISCST-3) run

using meteorology data, identifying

source & receptor. Prediction of

GLC & plotting isopleths. Study of

GLCs obtained & calculating

cumulative concentration of

pollutants. Contribution in EIA

documentation.

Water

Pollution

(WP)

Dr. Mahendra

Sadaria

&

Ms. Daksha

Gupta


Task: Site visit, selection of

sampling locations, review &

interpret baseline water quality,

water balance calculation for the

project, prediction of impacts &

proposed mitigation measures,

contribution in EIA documentation.

Functional

Areas

Name of the

Expert

Involvement

(Period and Task)

Signature &

date

Ecology and

Bio-diversity

Conservation

(EB)

Mr. Silbhadra

Brahma

Period: Jan, 2018 to Apr, 2018

Task: Site visit/survey for ecology

study, review of Greenbelt

development requirement of the

project-suggestion for species, type

of plantation and contribution in

EIA documentation.

Solid and

Hazardous

Waste

Management

(SHW)

Dr. Mahendra

Sadaria

&

Mr. Ashok

Kumar Sharma


Task: Identified source of

generation of Hazardous waste &

disposal methods, studying

adequacy of mitigation measures

for management of hazardous

waste.

Socio

Economy

(SE)

Dr. Sheetal

Tamakuwala

TM: Shobhana

Sadaria


Task: Site visit, data collection,

evaluation of Socio-Economic status

of the study area, assessment of

the possible chances to socio-

economic issues arising out of the

proposed activity & contribution in

EIA documentation.

Land Use

(LU)

Dr. R D Shah

&

Vinay Kurakula


Task: Site visit, development of

land use map of study area,

prepare land use classification and

determine LULC of the area,

prediction of impact on land use

pattern, Suggest mitigation

measures, contribution in EIA

report.

Hydrogeology

(HG & Geo)

Hardik Patel

&

Yamesh

Sharma


Task: Site visit, understanding and

representing ground water

conditions, identification of impacts,

suggestion of mitigation measures

and contribution of EIA

documentation.

Risk and

Hazards (RH)

Mr. Ashok

Kumar Sharma

TM: Mahendra

Sadaria


Task: Determine worst & most

credible accident scenarios,

Identification of modeling

scenarios, consequence modeling,

finalization of RA, contribution in

EIA documentation.

Functional

Areas

Name of the

Expert

Involvement

(Period and Task)

Signature &

date

Noise Ajay Dwivedi

&

Vinay Kurakula


Task: Site visit, selection of

sampling locations, review baseline

noise levels, source & its

compliance with permissible limits,

contribution in EIA documentation.

Declaration by the Head of the accredited consultant organization/

authorized person

We, Dr. Mahendra Sadaria & Ashok Sharma, hereby confirm that the above

mentioned experts prepared the EIA of Genext Steels Private Limited at

Survey Nos. 661, 662, 664, 665, 1822 & 1823, Village: Bagodara, Tehsil:

Bavla, District: Ahmedabad, Gujarat. We also confirm that, the consultant

organization shall be fully accountable for any misleading information

mentioned in this statement.

Signature:

Name: Dr. Mahendra Sadaria Mr. Ashok Sharma

Designation: Director, Technical CEO

Name of the EIA

Consultant organization

San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd. Shivalik Solid Waste

Management Ltd.

NABET Certificate No. and

date

NABET/EIA/1619/RA0084,

Valid till 23.12.2019

NABET/EIA/1619/RA0040,

Valid till 16.02.2019

San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd. in association with Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited

Final EIA Report of Genext Steels Private Limited I

Contents Particulars Page No.

Index I

List of Tables IX

List of Figures XII

List of Annexures XIII

Index Chapter 1 Introduction Page No.

1.1 Preface 1-1

1.2 Purpose of the Report 1-1

1.3 Identification of Project & Project Proponent 1-3

1.3.1 Identification of Project 1-3

1.3.2 Identification of Project Proponent 1-3

1.4 Brief description of project 1-4

1.4.1 Nature of the project 1-4

1.4.2 Size of the project 1-4

1.4.3 Project Location 1-4

1.5 Importance of the project 1-5

1.6 Applicable environmental regulatory framework 1-7

1.7 Scope of the EIA study 1-7

1.8 Methodology for EIA 1-9

1.9 Compliance of Terms of Reference (ToRs) 1-9

1.10 List of Industries surrounding project site 1-23

1.11 Structure of report 1-24

Chapter 2 Project Description

2.1 Introduction 2-1

2.2 Need of the project 2-1

2.3 Location of the Project 2-2

2.4 Size or magnitude of operation 2-7

2.4.1 Land breakup & project site layout 2-7

2.4.2 Project Magnitude 2-8

2.5 Input Requirements 2-8

2.6 Proposed schedule for approval and implementation 2-12


Final EIA Report of Genext Steels Private Limited II

2.7 Technology & process description 2-12

2.8 Utilities and auxiliary services 2-26

2.9 Generation of pollutants 2-26

2.9.1 Wastewater generation 2-26

2.9.2 Gaseous emission 2-26

2.9.3 Stack height calculation for all plants 2-27

2.9.4 Hazardous and solid waste generation 2-30

2.9.5 Noise Generation 2-32

2.10 Pollution control strategy 2-32

2.10.1 Effluent management 2-32

2.10.2 Air pollution control measures 2-34

2.10.3 Fugitive emission control 2-35

2.10.4 Hazardous and solid waste management 2-35

2.10.5 Noise pollution control measures 2-36

2.11 Rain water harvesting 2-36

2.12 Green Belt Development 2-36

2.13 Occupational health & safety 2-37

Chapter 3 Description of Environment

3.1 General 3-1

3.2 Study area 3-1

3.3 Study Period 3-2

3.4 Source of environmental data generation 3-2

3.5 Methodology 3-3

3.6 Land Environment 3-3

3.6.1 Land use pattern of the Study Area 3-4

3.6.2 Objective of Land Use Studies 3-4

3.6.3 Topography 3-5

3.6.4 Seismicity of the area 3-5

3.7 Meteorology 3-5

3.7.1 Site specific micro-meteorological data 3-6

3.7.2 Wind Rose 3-6

3.8 Ambient air quality 3-7

3.8.1 Introduction 3-7

3.8.2 Design of Network for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Stations

3-7

3.8.3 Reconnaissance 3-7


Final EIA Report of Genext Steels Private Limited III

3.8.4 Parameters, Frequency and monitoring Methodology 3-9

3.8.5 Interpretation of result 3-9

3.9 Geology & Hydrogeology of study area 3-10

3.9.1 Geology 3-10

3.9.2 Hydrogeology 3-10

3.10 Water quality 3-12

3.10.1 Introduction 3-12

3.10.2 Sampling Frequency, Techniques & Methodology 3-13

3.10.3 Surface Water Quality (Primary data) 3-14

3.10.4 Ground Water Quality 3-14

3.10.5 Interpretation 3-14

3.10.6 Conclusion 3-15

3.11 Noise Environment 3-15

3.11.1 Instrument used for Sampling and Monitoring 3-16

3.11.2 Noise Quality Monitoring Locations 3-16

3.11.3 Ambient Noise Standards 3-16

3.11.4 Results 3-16


3.12 Soil Environment 3-17

3.12.1 Soil sampling locations 3-17

3.12.2 Methodology 3-18

3.12.3 Corollaries 3-19


3.13 Biological Environment 3-20

3.13.1 Period of the study 3-20

3.13.2 Study methodology 3-20

3.13.3 Floral species in the study area 3-21

3.13.4 Fauna in the study area 3-21

3.14 Traffic survey 3-21

3.15 Socio Economic Environment 3-22

3.15.1 Objective of the study 3-22

3.15.2 Land use pattern and infrastructure 3-23

3.15.3 Demographic and Socio-Economic Environment 3-23

3.15.4 Living Standard and Infrastructure 3-24


Final EIA Report of Genext Steels Private Limited IV

Chapter 4 Anticipated Environmental Impacts & Mitigation

Measures

4.1 General 4-1

4.2 Identification of Impact 4-2

4.2.1 Identification of Impacting Activities 4-2

4.2.2 Identification of Environment Attributes 4-3

4.3 Impact on Topography 4-3

4.4 Impact on Air Environment 4-3

4.4.1 Air Pollution Dispersion modeling of stack 4-5

4.4.2 Model input data 4-6

4.4.3 Output of the model 4-6

4.4.4 Incremental & cumulative concentration of pollutants 4-7


4.5 Impact on Water Environment 4-7

4.6 Impact on Noise Environment 4-10

4.7 Impact on Land Environment 4-11

4.8 Impact on Biological Environment 4-12

4.9 Impact on Socio-Economic Environment 4-13

4.10 Impact on Occupational Health & Safety 4-14

4.11 Prediction of impact due to vehicular movement 4-15

Chapter 5 Analysis of Alternatives

5.1 Prologue 5-1

5.2 Site Alternative 5-1

5.3 Process Alternative 5-3

Chapter 6 Environmental Monitoring Program

6.1 Prelude 6-1

6.2 Environment Monitoring Program 6-1

6.3 Objective of Monitoring Plan 6-1

6.4 Schedule for Environment Monitoring 6-2

6.5 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring 6-2

6.6 Wastewater Monitoring 6-3

6.7 Ambient noise level monitoring 6-3

Chapter 7 Additional Studies

(A) Risk Assessment 7-1



Final EIA Report of Genext Steels Private Limited V

7.2 Study objective 7-1

7.3 Hazardous identification 7-2

7.3.1 Identification of source of Ignition 7-3

7.3.2 Identification of sources of Fire & Explosion 7-3

7.3.3 Thermal radiation 7-3

7.3.4 Physical hazards onsite 7-3

7.3.5 Loading/Unloading operation/Storage 7-4

7.3.6 Silo cleaning operation 7-4

7.3.7 Steel Melting Shop 7-4

7.3.8 Electrical Hazard 7-4

7.3.9 Dust and Gas 7-5

7.3.10 Captive Power plant (CPP Unit) 7-5

7.3.11 Waste Heat Recovery Boiler (WHRB Unit) 7-6

7.3.12 Respiratory Hazards 7-6

7.3.13 Noise 7-6

7.3.14 Fire & Explosion Hazards 7-6

7.3.15 Heat and Hot Liquid 7-7

7.3.16 Fire & Explosion Index 7-7

7.3.17 Heat Stress 7-9

7.4 Mitigation measures 7-9

7.4.1 Coal handling plant 7-10

7.4.2 Induction Furnace 7-10

7.4.3 Control Rooms 7-11

7.4.4 Gas Explosion, Prevention & Preventive Measure 7-11

7.4.5 Mitigation measure for Hot Metal spillage 7-12

7.4.6 Electrical safety 7-12

7.4.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 7-13

7.5 Natural calamities which may lead to emergency 7-14

7.5.1 Heat stroke 7-14

7.5.2 Earthquake 7-15

7.5.3 Cyclone 7-16

7.5.4 Flood 7-18

7.6 General Safety Precautions & Occupational Health 7-19

7.7 Risk Reduction Measures 7-21

7.8 General Working Conditions 7-22


Final EIA Report of Genext Steels Private Limited VI

7.8.1 Safe Operating Procedures 7-23

7.8.2 Work Permit System 7-23

7.8.3 Personnel Protective Equipment (PPEs) 7-23

7.8.4 Emergency Preparedness 7-23

7.8.5 Static Electricity 7-23

7.8.6 Access 7-24

7.8.7 Material handling 7-24

7.8.8 Communication System 7-24

7.8.9 First Aid Facilities 7-24

7.8.10 Accident Reporting, Investigation and Analysis 7-24

7.8.11 Safety Inspections 7-24

7.8.12 Safe Operating Procedures 7-24

7.9 Disaster Management Plan (DMP) 7-24

7.9.1 Objectives 7-25

7.9.2 Elements of On-Site Emergency Plan 7-25

7.9.3 Organization 7-25

7.9.4 Duty Allocation 7-25

7.10 Industrial Hazards and Safety 7-27

7.10.1 Hazard Identification 7-27

7.11 On-Site Management Plan 7-27

7.11.1 Objectives, Scope and Contents of On-Site Emergency Plan 7-27

7.11.2 Scope of Onsite Emergency Plan 7-28

7.11.3 Emergency 7-29

7.11.4 Methodology 7-29

7.11.5 Structure of Emergency Management 7-30

7.11.6 Infrastructure at Emergency Control Centre 7-31

7.11.7 Assembly Point 7-31

7.11.8 Emergency Management Training 7-32

7.11.9 Mock Drills 7-32

7.11.10 Proposed Communication System 7-33

7.11.11 Emergency Medical Facilities 7-33

7.12 Off Site Emergency Plan 7-33

(B) Social Impact Assessment 7-36

(C) Public Consultation 7-43


Final EIA Report of Genext Steels Private Limited VII

Chapter 8 Project Benefits


8.2 Improvement in Physical Infrastructure 8-1

8.3 Improvement in Social Infrastructure 8-1

8.4 Employment Potential 8-2

8.5 Socio-Economic Development Activities Proposed 8-2

8.5.1 How to utilize CER funds 8-2

8.6 Other Tangible Benefits 8-3

Chapter 9 Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis 9-1

Chapter 10 Environment Management Plan


10.2 Environmental Management During Construction Phase 10-2

10.2.1 Air & Noise Environment 10-2

10.2.2 Water Supply & Sanitation 10-2

10.2.3 Waste 10-2

10.2.4 Socio-Economic Environment 10-3

10.2.5 Health & Safety 10-3

10.3 Environmental Management during the Operational Phase 10-3

10.3.1 Air Pollution Control 10-3

10.3.1.1 Source of Air Pollution & Control Measures 10-3

10.3.1.2 Action Plan for Control of Fugitive Emission 10-5

10.3.2 Water Environment 10-6

10.3.3 Hazardous & Solid waste management 10-8

10.3.4 Noise Control 10-9

10.3.5 Green Belt Development 10-9

10.3.6 Occupational Health Hazard & Mitigation Measures 10-11

10.3.6.1 Personal Protective Equipment 10-13

10.3.6.2 Plans for Periodic Medical Checkup 10-14

10.4 Post Project Environmental Monitoring 10-14

10.5 Environment Management Budget Allocation 10-15

10.6 Environmental Management Cell 10-16

10.6.1 Hierarchical Structure of Environmental Management Cell 10-17

10.6.2 Reporting System of Non-Compliances/Violations of

Environmental Norms

10-17

10.6.3 Framework for Continual Improvement of Environmental

Performance of Organization

10-18

10.7 Resource Conservation and Cleaner Production 10-18


Final EIA Report of Genext Steels Private Limited VIII

10.8 Energy conservation programme 10-19

10.9 Socio-Economic Environment 10-20

Chapter 11 Summary & Conclusion

11.1 Project Description 11-1

11.1.1 General Introduction 11-1

11.1.2 Project location & Environment sensitivity 11-1

11.1.3 Salient features of the project 11-2

11.1.4 Investment of the project 11-2

11.1.5 List of Products 11-2

11.2 Description of Environment 11-3

11.2.1 Baseline Environmental Study 11-3

11.2.2 Air Environment 11-3

11.2.3 Water Environment 11-4

11.2.4 Noise Environment 11-6

11.2.5 Soil Quality 11-6

11.2.6 Biological Environment 11-6

11.2.7 Socio-Economic Environment 11-6

11.3 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures 11-7

11.3.1 Summary of Impacts on Air Environment 11-7

11.3.2 Summary of Impacts on Water Environment 11-8

11.3.3 Impacts on Noise quality & Mitigation measures 11-9

11.3.4 Summary of Impacts on Land Environment 11-9

11.3.5 Summary of Impact on Socio Economy 11-10

11.3.6 Summary of Impact on Ecology 11-10

11.4 Environment Monitoring Programme 11-10

11.5 Additional Studies 11-11

11.5.1 Risk Assessment 11-11

11.6 Project Benefits 11-11

11.7 Environmental Management Plan 11-11

11.8 Conclusion 11-14

Chapter-12 Disclosure of Consultant engaged

12.1 Brief about San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd. 12-1

12.2 Brief resume and Nature of Consultancy Rendered by Shivalik

Solid Waste Management Limited

12-2


Final EIA Report of Genext Steels Private Limited IX

List of Tables

Table

No.

Name Page No.

1.1 Product details 1-4

1.2 Salient features of the project site 1-5

1.3 Compliance to Terms of Reference issued by MoEF&CC 1-9

2.1 Land use planning 2-7

2.2 List of products with its capacity 2-8

2.3 Plant facility 2-8

2.4 Raw material requirement 2-9

2.5 Typical compositions of main raw material (Iron-Ore/Iron

Oxide)

2-10

2.6 Breakup of water consumption & w/w generation 2-10

2.7 Details of fuel consumption 2-12

2.8 Energy Balance 2-25

2.9 Details of stacks 2-28

2.10 Estimated Air Emission quality 2-30

2.11 Details of Hazardous & solid waste 2-31

2.12 Range of chemical compositions in slag 2-31

2.13 Characteristic of effluent 2-33

2.14 Details of ETP units 2-33

2.15 Technical specification of Induction Furnace 2-38

2.16 Technical specification of ESP 2-38

2.17 Typical Technical specification of Bag filter 2-39

3.1 Environmental setting of the study area 3-2

3.2 Land use statistics work out based on satellite imaginary 3-5

3.3 Monitoring Methodology of Meteorological Data 3-6

3.4 Meteorological Data for the Monitoring Period

(January, 2018 to March, 2018)

3-6

3.5 Methodology of Ambient Air Monitoring 3-8

3.6 Monitored Parameters and Frequency of Sampling 3-9

3.7 Sampling locations with source & date of sampling 3-13

3.8 Monitoring Methodology of Noise 3-16

3.9 Location of soil sampling 3-18

3.10 Methodology of Soil Sample analysis 3-18


Final EIA Report of Genext Steels Private Limited X

3.11 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations 3-26

3.12 Ambient Air Quality Status 3-27

3.13 Ambient Air Quality Status (PM10) 3-28

3.14 Ambient Air Quality Status (PM2.5) 3-29

3.15 Ambient Air Quality Status (SO2) 3-30

3.16 Ambient Air Quality Status (NOx) 3-31

3.17 Ambient Air Quality Status (CO, HC (Methane & non-

Methane), VOC)

3-32

3.18 National Ambient Air Quality Standards 3-33

3.19 Results of Groundwater Quality in the Study Area 3-34

3.20 Surface water analysis of Study Area 3-35

3.21 Indian Standard Specification for Drinking Water 3-36

3.22 Ambient Noise Levels in the Study Area 3-37

3.23 Ambient Air Quality Standards with respect to Noise 3-37

3.24 Soil Analysis of Study area 3-38

3.25 Floral Diversity 3-39

3.26 Faunal Biodiversity 3-41

3.27 Traffic Survey 3-43

3.28 Land Use Pattern 3-44

3.29 Summary of Socio-Economic Status of Study area

(Demography)

3-45

3.30 Summary of Socio-Economic Status of Study area

(Amenities)

3-46

4.1 Input data for air quality modeling 4-18

4.2 Cumulative Concentrations at various locations 4-19

4.3 The 24-hourly average GLC Concentration Values for SPM 4-20

4.4 The 24-hourly average GLC Concentration Values for SO2 4-21

4.5 The 24-hourly average GLC Concentration Values for NOx 4-22

6.1 Environment Monitoring Plan 6-3

7.1 List of Damages Envisaged at Various Heat Loads 7-3

7.2 Degree of Hazards Based on F&EI 7-8

7.3 Calculated Degree of Hazards for Genext 7-8

7.4 Details of Fire Fighting Facilities onsite 7-12

7.5 Summary of Recommended Personal Protective

Equipment According to Hazard

7-13

7.6 Emergency recovery plan 7-16

7.7 PEL level Summary as per OSHA 7-20


Final EIA Report of Genext Steels Private Limited XI

7.8 Organization Chart 7-25

7.9 Detailed expenditure for CER activities 7-42

7.10 Point raised during public hearing 7-43

10.1 List of PPEs 10-13

10.2 Environment Monitoring Plan 10-15

10.3 Budget Allocation for Environment Management 10-15

10.4 Detailed expenditure for CER activities 10-21


Final EIA Report of Genext Steels Private Limited XII

List of Figures

Figure No.

Name Page No.

2.1 Location of the project site 2-4

2.2 Satellite image 2-5

2.3 Image showing all boundary coordinates of the site 2-5

2.4 Eco-Sensitive Zone Map of Nalsarovar Bird Sanctuary 2-6

2.5 Plant Layout 2-7

2.6 Water Balance Diagram 2-11

2.7 Overall flow chart with material balance of raw materials

and products

2-25

3.1 Land use map 3-4

3.2 Graphical representation of ambient air quality 3-27

3.3 Graphical representation for PM10 3-28

3.4 Graphical representation for PM2.5 3-29

3.5 Graphical representation for SO2 3-30

3.6 Graphical representation for NOx 3-31

3.7 Location of AAQM station 3-48

3.8 Wind Rose Diagram 3-49

3.9 Water sampling Locations 3-50

3.10 Noise monitoring Locations 3-51

3.11 Soil Sampling Locations 3-52

3.12 Topo sheet of location with site location map of 10 km radius

3-53

4.1 Isopleths for Ground Level Concentrations for SPM 4-23

4.2 Isopleths for Ground Level Concentrations for SO2 4-24

4.3 Isopleths for Ground Level Concentrations for NOx 4-25

10.1 Environment Management Cell 10-17


Final EIA Report of Genext Steels Private Limited XIII

List of Annexures

Sr. No. Annexures Page no.

I. NABET-QCI Certificates A–1

II. CGWA Application A–3

III. Photographs of the Site A–11

IV. Land Possession Documents A–13

V. Interest letter from Brick manufacturers A–19

VI. Rain water Harvesting plan A–20

VII. EHS Policy A–23

VIII. Undertaking from Project Proponent A–24

IX. Undertaking from Consultants A–25

X. Copy of Terms of Reference (TOR) A–27

San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd. in association with


Final EIA Report of Genext Steels Private Limited 1-1

Chapter-1

Introduction

1.1 PREFACE

An Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is an assessment of the

possible impacts that a proposed project may have on the environment -

consisting of the environmental, social and economic aspects. It is an

assessment and management tool that evaluates the possible impacts,

positive or negative, that a proposed project may have on the

environment. EIA systematically examines both beneficial and adverse

consequences of the project and ensures that these effects are taken into

account during project design. The purpose of the assessment is to

ensure that decision makers consider the ensuing environmental impacts

when deciding to proceed with a project. In India, Ministry of

Environment, Forest & Climate Change (MoEF&CC) has made prior

Environmental Clearance (EC) for certain developmental projects

mandatory through its notification issued on 14th September, 2006 and

its subsequent amendment thereof.

1.2 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT

India‟s economic growth is contingent upon the growth of the Indian steel

industry. It is traditionally considered the backbone of national economic

development. Steel industry has tremendous forward and backward

linkages in terms of material flow, income and employment generation.

Steel plays a vital role in the development of any modern and emerging

economy.

Industrialization and infrastructure development have increased economic

growth and improved living standards of people in India. However,

development has led to rapid consumption of natural resources and

increased emissions of waste. To control the pollution from industrial

activity; government has framed regulations which are governed by

MoEF&CC in India. EC is mandatory as per the EIA Notification issued by

MoEF&CC, New Delhi dated 14th September, 2006 and its subsequent

amendment for setting up a new projects or activities, or expansion or




modernization of existing projects or activities based on their potential

environmental impacts as indicated in the Schedule to the notification,

being undertaken in any part of India.

The proposed project activity has both positive and negative impacts on

the environment. The negative impacts include environmental

degradation and adverse socio economic changes. It is the responsibility

of the company to document the associated positive and negative

impacts, so that the attempts can be made to minimize the effects due to

the negative impacts and maximize the benefits due to the positive

impacts. In this regards, Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and

Environmental Management Plan (EMP) have been considered as the

most important documentation in understanding the environmental

implications and safeguarding the environment.

The proposed project activity is listed at S. No. 3(a) Metallurgical

Industries (ferrous & non-ferrous) under Category “A” of EIA Notification,

2006 and its subsequent amendments and the proposal will be appraised

at Central level. Therefore, prior Environmental Clearance is required

from MoEF&CC for the proposed project of Genext Steels Pvt. Ltd.

In order to obtain Environmental Clearance for the proposed Steel plant,

Form-1, proposed TOR along with Pre-Feasibility Report were submitted

to the Honorable Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change

(MoEF&CC), New Delhi. Presentation was made before the Expert

Appraisal Committee of MoEF&CC on 14.11.2017 for the approval of

Terms of Reference (TOR) for EIA study. Subsequently ToR was issued by

MoEF&CC on 19.06.2018. Public hearing was completed based on the

Draft EIA report submitted to Gujarat Pollution Control Board (GPCB).

Minutes of meeting of public hearing is attached as Annexure-XI. Final

EIA/EMP report prepared incorporating point raised during the Public

hearing. Final EIA report will be submitted to MoEF&CC for EC.

EIA Consultant

In view of the above, baseline monitoring work has been carried out for

all the environmental attributers by M/s. San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd. (SEPL),




Ahmedabad and EIA report jointly prepared by San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd. &

Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited (SSWML), Punjab.

SEPL is accredited as Category-A organization under the QCI-NABET

Scheme for accreditation of EIA consultant Organizations and Category-B

for specific sector 3(a) for preparing EIA-EMP report. SSWML is accredited

as Category-A organization under the QCI-NABET Scheme for

accreditation of EIA consultant Organizations and Category-A for specific

sector 3(a) for preparing EIA-EMP report.

1.3 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT & PROJECT PROPONENT

1.3.1 Identification of Project

Genext Steels Private Limited proposes to set up mini integrated steel

plant with power plant at Village: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla, District:

Ahmedabad, Gujarat. The proposed project activity is categorized as

Category „A‟ project and listed at S. No. 3(a) as per the EIA Notification,

2006 and amendment therein.

The manufacturing technology inter-alia include manufacturing of pellets

through rotary kilns/travelling Grate; manufacturing of Sponge Iron

through Rotary kilns; manufacturing of MS Billets through Induction

Furnace along with Concast; manufacturing of Structural Steel, TMT bars

& rolled products through Rolling Mill; Power generation through WHRB &

FBC Boiler.

1.3.2 Identification of Project Proponent

Genext Steels Private Limited is public limited registered under company

act in the year 2013. List of Directors/Background/Experience is given

below:

i) Mr. Vinod Kedia - a commerce graduate having 25 years of

experience in steel manufacturing.

ii) Mr. Rakesh Bansal, a commerce graduate having 30 years of

experience in steel melting and structural manufacturing.

iii) Mr. Rajesh Naredi, a commerce graduate having 25 years of

experience in manufacturers of ceiling/table fans and other

accessories.




iv) Mr. Pankaj Jindal, a Business Management Graduate having 20

years of experience in pipe manufacturing.

v) Mr. Vineet Kedia, a Business management graduate having 10 years

of experience in steel manufacturing and commercial aspects.

1.4 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT

1.4.1 Nature of the project

Proposed steel project comprises of Pellet plant, Direct Reduced Iron

(DRI) Plant, Induction Furnace, Rolling Mill & Power Plant. The proposed

project consists of establishing an integrated steel making facility using

following raw materials.

Unit Description

Pellet Manufacturing of pellet using iron ore/iron oxide (mill

scale), bentonite, and imported coal as raw materials

DRI Kiln Manufacturing of Sponge Iron using pellet, imported coal,

and dolomite as raw materials

Induction

Furnace

Manufacturing of MS Billets using Sponge Iron, M S

Scrap, and Ferro Alloys as raw materials

Rolling Mill Manufacturing of Rolled products using Billets

Power plant By utilizing hot waste flue gases from DRI kilns in WHRB.

By utilizing Coal & Dolochar in FBC boiler as fuel.

1.4.2 Size of the project

The proposed steel plant is proposed to manufacture following products.

Table 1.1 Product details

Sr. No.

Production Unit Product Plant Configuration

Production Capacity

1 Pellet Plant Pellets 4 x 200 TPD 800 TPD

2 DRI Kilns Sponge Iron 4 x 150 TPD 600 TPD

3 Steel Melting

Shop

MS Billets Induction

furnace: 4 x

25 MT/heat

CCM: Eight-

strand billet

caster

975 TPD

4 Rolling Mill Structural steel,

TMT bars & Rolled products

2 x 500 TPD 1000 TPD

5 Power Plant

A WHRB Electricity 1 x 7 MW 7 MW

B FBC Electricity 1 x 5 MW 5 MW

1.4.3 Project Location




The proposed project site is located at Survey Nos. 661, 662, 664, 665,

1822 & 1823, Vill: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla, Dist: Ahmedabad, Gujarat. It

is well connected by NH8A and rail with rest of the country.

The salient features of the project site are presented in below table.

Table 1.2 Salient Features of the project site

Features Details

Location Vill: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla, Dist: Ahmedabad

Coordinates of Centre of

the project site

Latitude: 22°37‟35.22”N

Longitude: 72° 9‟48.72”E

Altitude 50-55 m above MSL

Topography Plain

Seismic Zone Seismic Zone-III

Total plant area 37.82 acres (153061 m2)

Nearest

Human habitation Bagodara, about 2.7 km towards ENE direction

Town Bavla, about 30.45 km towards NE direction

City Ahmedabad, about 50 km towards NE direction

Railway Station Arnej Railway Station, about 12.0 km towards ESE direction

Highway NH8A (A‟bad-Rajkot), about 523.45 m towards

S direction SH8 (Bagodara-Vataman), about 4.4 km towards ENE direction

Air Port Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel International Airport,

Ahmedabad, about 67.0 km towards NE direction

Water body Bhogavo River (Seasonal), about 0.7 km towards S direction

Reserve Forests/National

Park/Wildlife Sanctuary

None within 10 km radius,

Nalsarovar Bird Sanctuary, about 12 km towards NNW direction

Eco Sensitive Zone (ESZ) ESZ of Nalsarovar Bird Sanctuary, about 1.9 km towards NNW direction

Historical/Archaeological

place


Lothal is at distance of 15.0 km towards SE direction

Note: Aerial distances are mentioned in above table

1.5 IMPORTANCE OF THE PROJECT

Steel is a basic commodity for all industrial activities and its consumption

marks industrial prosperity. It is often considered to be an indicator of

economic progress of the country. The Indian steel industry, one of the

core industries in India, is more than a century old when the first

integrated steel plant was established by Tata in 1907. Currently, India is




the 4th largest steel producer in the world; presently producing about 90

Million Tonnes of steel and as per the 'National Steel Policy', India is

expected to raise this production to 293 million tonnes by the year 2020.

Today, the Indian steel industry contributes approximately 2% to the

country‟s GDP and employs about 5 lakh people directly and about 20

lakh people indirectly. Major sectors such as infrastructure, engineering,

aviation, construction, automobiles, power plants and railways are

dependent on the availability of Iron & Steel. Iron & Steel industry

accelerates industrialization and is, therefore, called the backbone of all

industries.

The Indian steel sector has an advantage of domestic availability of raw

materials and cheap labours. Iron ore is also available in abundant

quantities. This abundance has been providing a major cost advantage to

the domestic steel industry. The per capita steel consumption is generally

accepted as yardstick to measure the level of socio-economic

development and living standards of its countrymen. As such no

developing country can afford to ignore steel industry.

Per capita consumption of steel in India is only 46 kg, whereas world

average is 150 kg. Per capita consumption of developed nations like USA

is 450 kg. Being a developing country, the consumption in the country

shall increase every year creating a good demand over the coming years.

Several initiatives mainly, affordable housing, expansion of railway

networks, development of domestic shipbuilding industry, opening up of

defense sector for private participation, and the anticipated growth in the

automobile sector, are expected to create significant demand for steel in

the country. The National Steel Policy, 2017, released by the

Government, also aims to increase steel production.

In order to realize the growth potential in the steel industry of India, it is

essential to ensure that the industry can remain competitive. Most

developed countries have regulations that are aimed to protect the

domestic steel industry. The Indian steel industry has comparatively

much lesser protection through regulation. Proper regulation should be

adopted by the Government to protect the domestic steel industry.




Benefits:

Project will help to decrease the demand supply gap of steel in the

country.

The proposed project will generate lot of employment opportunities

for the local people apart from several indirect benefits. During the

construction phase, it is expected that about 150-200 persons will

get employment directly or indirectly whereas during operation about

500-700 persons will be benefited.

Developmental activities will be carried out in the villages under CER

activities.

1.6 APPLICABLE ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY FRAMEWORK

The proposed project will abide and function under the purview of the

following Rules, Acts & Regulations which are formulated by the Govt. of

India to protect the environment and development in a sustainable way.

The Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1974

The Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1981

The Environmental (Protection) Act, 1986

The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977 and

their subsequent amendments

Environmental Impact Assessment Notification, 2006 and its

subsequent amendments

The Hazardous & Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary

Movement) Rules, 2016

The Manufacture, Storage and Import or Hazardous Chemical Rules,

1989 and its subsequent amendments

Solid Waste Management Rules, 2016

The Fly Ash Notification

Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 and its

amendments

The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991

1.7 SCOPE OF THE EIA STUDY

The scope of the Environment Impact Assessment study is based on the

guideline provided by Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change,




Government of India. EIA study has been carried out in an area of 10 km

radius from the boundary of the proposed site as per the ToRs issued by

MoEF&CC.

The scope of the EIA study broadly divided into following phases.

Identification of existing status of physical environment, biological

environment as well as socio economic components in the study

area.

Evaluation of present environment factors through analysis of

generated and collected baseline data for one complete season.

Collect & compile secondary data.

Study of various activities of the project and identify the impacts on

various environmental components.

Quantification/prediction of impacts on the various environmental

components due to implementation of the project with respect to

existing scenario.

Evaluation of impacts after superimposing the predicted scenario

over the baseline scenario.

Identification and assessment of risks associated with the proposed

project and their appropriate management through proper Risk

Assessment (RA).

Formulation of Environmental Management Plan (EMP) to mitigate

the predicted impacts; and

Identify critical environmental attributes required to be monitored

during the project execution and to suggest post project monitoring.

The baseline data has been collected for the following environmental

components, during January, 2018 to March, 2018, supplemented by

data collected from various Govt. Dept., census publications etc.

Ambient Air Quality

Micrometeorology

Noise Environment

Water Environment (Surface & Ground Water)

Soil Quality

Land use pattern




Ecology & Biodiversity

Demography & Socio-economic aspects

The study will help to determine the present environmental status and

likely impacts of the project in the region. It will help to prepare

appropriate EMP for the unit to minimize the adverse impacts, if any.

1.8 METHODOLOGY FOR EIA

Considering the nature and magnitude of the proposed project,

surrounding area and various guidelines available, an area of 10-km off

set/radial distance from the boundary of the proposed plant site was

considered for the purpose of environmental impact assessment study.

The monitoring/sampling locations have been established in accordance

with the guidelines issued by CPCB/MoEF&CC. Data has been analyzed as

per the standard methods for establishing the baseline data and so as to

determine the impact of proposed activity on the same.

1.9 COMPLIANCE OF TERMS OF REFERENCE

The Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change prescribed the

TORs vide F. No. “IA-J-11011/501/2017-IA-II(I)” dated

19.06.2018 for undertaking detailed EIA/EMP study for the purpose of

obtaining EC in accordance with the provisions of the EIA Notification,

2006. Compliance of TORs is as below:

Table 1.3 Compliance to Terms of Reference issued by MoEF&CC

Sr. No.

Condition Compliance

Specific TOR

1. Public Hearing to be conducted by the concerned State Pollution Control Board.

Public hearing is completed by GPCB. MoM of public hearing is

attached as Annexure-XI.

2. The issues raised during public hearing and commitment of the

project proponent on the same along with time bound action plan to implement the commitment and

financial allocation thereto should be clearly provided.

Issues raised during the Public hearing along with time bound

action plan of commitment and financial allocation is given in in Chapter-7, Table 7.10 (Page

no. 7-43).

3. The project proponent should carry

out social impact assessment of the project and submit the Corporate Environment Responsibility as per

the Ministry‟s Office Memorandum

Detailed social impact

assessment of the project and CER is given in Chapter-7, (Page no. 7-36).




vide F. No. 22-65/2017-IA.III dated

1st May 2018.

4. The project proponent shall carry out

detailed traffic study of the existing network and impact of the proposed project on the road network. The

report shall be placed before the public during the public hearing.

Detailed traffic survey is given

in sec. 3.14, page no. 3-21 & Table 3.27, page no. 3-43 of Chapter-3.

The report will be placed before the public, during public

hearing.

ANNEXURE-I

GENERIC TERMS OF REFERENCE (ToR) IN RESPECT OF INDUSTRY SECTOR

1. Executive Summary Enclosed as Chapter-11.

2. Introduction

i Details of the EIA Consultant

including NABET accreditation.

Details of EIA consultants -

SEPL and SSWML are given in Chapter-12 - „Disclosure of

Consultant engaged‟. NABET accreditation certificate is enclosed as Annexure-I.

ii Information about the project

proponent.

It is described in Chapter-1,

Section 1.3.2 (Page no. 1-3).

iii Importance and benefits of the project.

Importance of the project is described in Chapter-1, Section 1.5 (Page no. 1-5).

Benefits of the project are described in Chapter-8 of EIA

report.

3. Project Description

i Cost of project and time of

completion.

It is described in Chapter-2,

Section 2.1 (Paragraph 2; Page no. 2-1).

ii Products with capacities for the proposed project.

It is described in Chapter-2, Section 2.4.2 (Page no. 2-8).

iii If expansion project, details of

existing products with capacities and whether adequate land is available for expansion, reference of earlier EC

if any.

Not applicable

(New project proposal).

iv List of raw materials required and their source along with mode of

transportation.

List of raw materials required and their source along with

mode of transportation is given in in Chapter 2, Table 2.4 (Page no. 2-9).

v Other chemicals and materials

required with quantities and storage capacities.

There will be no use of any

chemicals. Requirement of raw materials and its storage is

covered in Chapter 2, Table 2.4 (Page no. 2-9).

vi Details of Emission, effluents, hazardous waste generation and

Generation of pollutants is described in Chapter-2,




their management. Section 2.9 (Page no. 2-26) &

its management is given in Section 2.10 (Page no. 2-32).

vii Requirement of water, power, with

source of supply, status of approval, water balance diagram, man-power requirement (regular and contract).

Water requirement is given in

Chapter-2, Section 2.5 (b), page no. 2-10. Water required for the proposed project will be

sourced from Ground Water source. Water drawl

permission from CGWA is under process, kindly refer Annexure-II.

Power required for the proposed project will be

sourced partly from captive power plant & partly from Gujarat State Grid. Refer to

Section 2.5 (c), page no. 2-12 of Chapter 2 of EIA report

power requirement. Manpower requirement is given in Chapter-2, Section 2.5

(e), page no. 2-12.

viii The project proponent shall furnish the requisite documents from the

competent authority in support of drawl of ground water and surface water and supply of electricity.

Water requirement for the proposed project will be

sourced from Ground Water source. Water drawl permission from CGWA is

under process, kindly refer Annexure-II.

ix Process description along with major equipment and machineries, process

flow sheet (Quantitative) from raw material to products to be provided.

Process description is given in Chapter-2, Section 2.7 (Page

no. 2-12). Overall flow chart with

material balance of raw materials and products is given

in Figure 2.7, page no. 2-25. Plant facility is given in Chapter-2, Table 2.3 (Page no.

2-8).

x. Hazard identification and details of proposed safety systems.

Hazard identification is described in Chapter-7, Section 7.3 (Page no. 7-2);

details of proposed safety system are covered in Section

7.6 (Page no. 7-19).

xi. Expansion/modernization proposals: Not applicable (New project proposal).

a. Copy of all the Environmental Clearance(s) including Amendments

there to obtain for the project from MoEF&CC/SEIAA shall be attached as

an Annexure. A certified copy of the

Not applicable (New project proposal).




latest Monitoring Report of the

Regional Office of the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate

Change as per circular dated 30th May, 2012 on the status of compliance of conditions stipulated in

all the existing environmental clearances including Amendments

shall be provided. In addition, status of compliance of Consent to Operate for the ongoing/existing operation of

the project from SPCB shall be attached with the EIA-EMP report.

b. In case the existing project has not

obtained environmental clearance, reasons for not taking EC under the provisions of the EIA Notification

1994 and/or EIA Notification 2006 shall be provided. Copies of Consent

to Establish/No Objection Certificate and Consent to Operate (in case of units operating prior to EIA

Notification 2006, CTE and CTO of FY 2005-2006) obtained from the SPCB

shall be submitted. Further, compliance report to the conditions of consents from the SPCB shall be

submitted.

Not applicable

(New project proposal).

4. Site Details:

i. Location of the project site covering

village, Taluka/Tehsil, District and State, Justification for selecting the

site, whether other sites were considered.

Location of the project site

covering village, Tehsil, District and State is provided in

Chapter 1, Table 1.2 (Page no. 1-5); also shown in Chapter 2, Figure 2.1 to 2.3 (Page no. 2-4

to 2-5). Kindly refer to Section 5.2,

page no. 5-1 of Chapter 5 of EIA report for Justification for selecting the site & other

alternate sites considered.

ii. A toposheet of the study area of radius of 10km and site location on

1:50,000/1:25,000 scale on an A3/A2 sheet. (Including all eco-sensitive areas and environmentally

sensitive places).

Included in Chapter 3, Figure 3.12 (Page no. 3-53).

iii. Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four corners of the site.

Included in Chapter 2, Figure 2.3 (Page no. 2-5).

iv. Google map-Earth downloaded of the project site.

Included in Chapter 2, as Figure 2.1 (Page no. 2-4) and

Figure 2.2 (Page no. 2-5).

v. Layout maps indicating existing unit The proposed project is a




as well as proposed unit indicating

storage area, plant area, greenbelt area, utilities etc. If located within an

Industrial area/Estate/Complex, layout of Industrial Area indicating location of unit within the Industrial

area/Estate.

Greenfield project.

Refer Chapter 2, Figure 2.5 (Page no. 2-7) for Plant layout

showing proposed units including storage area, plant area, greenbelt area, utilities

etc.

vi. Photographs of the proposed and existing (if applicable) plant site. If

existing, show photographs of plantation/greenbelt, in particular.

Photographs of the proposed plant site are attached as

Annexure-III.

vii. Land use break-up of total land of the project site (identified and

acquired), government/private -agricultural, forest, wasteland, water bodies, settlements, etc. shall be

included. (Not required for industrial area).

Land use breakup is included in Chapter 2, Table 2.1 (Page

2-7).

viii. A list of major industries with name

and type within study area (10km radius) shall be incorporated.

Land use details of the study area.

A list of major industries with

name and type within study area is provided in Chapter 1, Section 1.10 (Page no. 1-23).

Land use details of the study area are included in Chapter 3,

Section 3.6 (Page no. 3-3).

ix. Geological features and Geo-hydrological status of the study area shall be included.

Geological features and Geo-hydrological status of the study area is included in

Chapter 3, Section 3.9 (Page no. 3-10).

x. Details of drainage of the project up to 5km radius of study area. If the

site is within 1 km radius of any major river, peak and lean season

river discharge as well as flood occurrence frequency based on peak

rainfall data of the past 30 years. Details of Flood Level of the project site and maximum Flood Level of the

river shall also be provided. (mega green field projects)

Bhogavo River is a seasonal river passing within a 5 km

radius which is flow from ENE to WSW.

No major river is passing within 1 km from project

boundary. No record of flood occurrence found in the region.

xi. Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition is not complete, stage of

the acquisition process and expected time of complete possession of the

land.

The total land envisaged for the proposed project is under

possession of the

management. Refer

Annexure-IV for land

documents.

xii. R&R details in respect of land in line with state Government policy.

Not applicable as there are no habitation in the land envisaged for the proposed

project.

5. Forest and wildlife related issues (if applicable):




i. Permission and approval for the use

of forest land (forestry clearance), if any, and recommendations of the

State Forest Department. (if applicable)

Not applicable, as there is no

forest land involved in the proposed project site.

ii. Land use map based on High resolution satellite imagery (GPS) of

the proposed site delineating the forestland (in case of projects

involving forest land more than 40 ha).

Not applicable, as there is no forest land involved in the

proposed project site.

iii. Status of Application submitted for obtaining the stage I forestry

clearance along with latest status shall be submitted.

Not applicable, as there is no forest land involved in the

proposed project site.

iv. The projects to be located within 10 km of the National Parks,

Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals,

the project proponent shall submit the map duly authenticated by Chief Wildlife Warden showing these

features vis-à-vis the project location and the recommendations or

comments of the Chief Wildlife Warden-thereon.

Not applicable, as there no National Parks, Sanctuaries,

Biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals

within 10 Km. radius of the project site.

v. Wildlife Conservation Plan duly authenticated by the Chief Wildlife

Warden of the State Government for conservation of Schedule I fauna, if

any exists in the study area.

No Schedule I was reported from the study area.

vi. Copy of application submitted for

clearance under the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, to the

Standing Committee of the National Board for Wildlife.

Not applicable

6. Environmental Status

i. Determination of atmospheric inversion level at the project site and site-specific micro-meteorological

data using temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind speed and

direction and rainfall.

Briefly covered in Chapter 3, Section 3.7 (Page 3-5).

ii. AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locations for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, CO and other parameters relevant to

the project shall be collected. The monitoring stations shall be based

CPCB guidelines and take into account the pre-dominant wind direction, population zone and

sensitive receptors including reserved forests.

Briefly covered in Chapter 3, Section 3.8 (Page 3-7).




iii. Raw data of all AAQ measurement for

12 weeks of all stations as per frequency given in the NAAQM

Notification of Nov. 2009 along with -min., max., average and 98% values for each of the AAQ parameters from

data of all AAQ stations should be provided as an annexure to the EIA

Report.

Briefly covered in Chapter 3,

Table 3.12 to 3.17 (Page 3-27 to 3-32).

iv. Surface water quality of nearby River

(100m upstream and downstream of discharge point) and other surface

drains at eight locations as per CPCB /MoEF&CC guidelines.

Unit will not discharge any

effluent outside the premises or into water body. Hence no

need to take the sample from 100m upstream and downstream of discharge

point. Available surface water

samples in the study area were collected from six

locations. Results are given in Chapter 3, Table 3.20 (Page no. 3-35).

v. Whether the site falls near to

polluted stretch of river identified by the CPCB/MoEF&CC.

No, the site doesn‟t fall near to

polluted stretch of the river identified by CPCB/MoEF&CC.

vi. Ground water monitoring at minimum at 8 locations shall be

included.

Covered in Chapter 3, Table 3.19 (Page no. 3-34).

vii. Noise levels monitoring at 8 locations within the study area.


viii. Soil Characteristic as per CPCB guidelines.


ix. Traffic study of the area, type of

vehicles, frequency of vehicles for

transportation of materials,

additional traffic due to proposed

project, parking arrangement etc.

Detailed traffic survey is given

in sec. 3.14, page no. 3-21 & Table 3.27, page no. 3-43 of

Chapter-3.

x. Detailed description of flora and

fauna (terrestrial and aquatic) existing in the study area shall be

given with special reference to rare, endemic and endangered species. If Schedule-I fauna are found within

the study area, a Wildlife Conservation Plan shall be prepared

and furnished.


Table 3.25 (Page no. 3-39) & 3.26 (Page no. 3-41).

No Schedule I was reported in the study area.

xi. Socio-economic status of the study area.


Section 3.15 (Page no. 3-22);

and Table 3.29 (Page no. 3-

45) & 3.30 (Page no. 3-46).




7. Impact and Environment Management Plan

i. Assessment of ground level concentration of pollutants from the

stack emission based on site-specific meteorological features. In case the

project is located on a hilly terrain, the AQIP Modeling shall be done using inputs of the specific terrain

characteristics for determining the potential impacts of the project on

the AAQ. Cumulative impact of all sources of emissions (including transportation) on the AAQ of the

area shall be assessed. Details of the model used and the input data used

for modeling shall also be provided. The air quality contours shall be

plotted on a location map showing the location of project site, habitation nearby, sensitive receptors, if any.

Assessment of ground level concentration of pollutant from

the stack emission superimposed on geographical

area map based on the site specific meteorological features is covered in Chapter

4, Figure 4.1 to 4.3 (Page no. 4-23 to 4-25).

The modeling approach is briefly covered in Chapter 4, Section 4.4.1 (Page no. 4-5).

Input parameters used for modeling are provided in Table

4.1 (Page no. 4-18), additional inputs - maximum 50 (24-hr)

average concentration values for SPM, SO2, NOx are given in Table 4.3 to 4.5 (Page no. 4-

20 to 4-22). Cumulative impact of all

sources of emissions on AAQ of the area is given in Table 4.2 (Page No. 4-19).

ii. Water Quality modeling – in case, if

the effluent is proposed to be discharged into the local drain, then Water Quality Modelling study should

be conducted for the drain water taking into consideration the

upstream and downstream quality of water of the drain.

Not applicable, as unit will not

discharge effluent in water body.

iii. Impact of the transport of the raw materials and end products on the

surrounding environment shall be assessed and provided. In this

regard, options for transport of raw materials and finished products and wastes (large quantities) by rail or

rail-cum road transport or conveyor-cum-rail transport shall be examined.

Impact of the transport of the raw materials and end

products on the surrounding environment is provided in

Chapter 4, Section 4.11 (Page No. 4-15). The impact of the transport of raw material and

the end products on the surrounding environment will

be insignificant. Additionally, there is no availability of nearby rail transport.

iv. A note on treatment of wastewater

from different plant operations, extent recycled and reused for

different purposes shall be included. Complete scheme of effluent treatment. Characteristics of

untreated and treated effluent to meet the prescribed standards of

Treatment on wastewater from

different plant operations, extent recycled and reuse for

different purposes is briefly described in Chapter 2, Section 2.10.1 (Page No. 2-32).

Characteristic of untreated and treated effluent is given in




discharge under E(P) Rules. Table 2.13, (Page No. 2-33).

v. Details of stack emission and action

plan for control of emissions to meet standards.

Details of stack emission and

action plan for control of emissions to meet standards

are covered in Chapter 2, Section 2.9.2 (Page no. 2-26) & 2.10.2 (Page no. 2-34).

vi. Measures for fugitive emission

control.

Measures for fugitive emission

control are covered in Chapter 2, Section 2.10.3 (Page no. 2-35) & Chapter 10, Section

10.3.1.2 (Page no. 10-5).

vii. Details of hazardous waste generation and their storage,

utilization and disposal. Copies of MOU regarding utilization of solid and hazardous waste in cement plant

shall also be included. EMP shall include the concept of waste-

minimization, recycle/reuse/recover techniques, Energy conservation, and natural resource conservation.

Details of hazardous waste generation and their storage,

utilization and management are covered in Chapter 2, Section 2.9.4 (Page no. 2-30),

Table 2.11 (Page no. 2-31) & 2.10.4 (Page no. 2-35).

Interest letter from brick manufacturer for utilization of Ash generated from the

proposed project is attached as Annexure-V.

Concepts of resource & energy conservation are covered in Chapter 10, Section 10.7

(Page no. 10-18) & 10.8 (Page no. 10-19).

viii. Proper utilization of fly ash shall be

ensured as per Fly Ash Notification, 2009. A detailed plan of action shall be provided.

Fly Ash will be given to brick

manufacturers in the surrounding areas. Interest letter from brick

manufacturer for utilization of Ash generated from the

proposed project is attached as Annexure-V.

ix. Action plan for the green belt development plan in 33% area i.e.

land with not less than 1,500 trees per ha. Giving details of species,

width of plantation; planning schedule etc. shall be included. The green belt shall be around the

project boundary and a scheme for greening of the roads used for the

project shall also be incorporated.

Layout plan earmarking space for development of green belt

is provided in Chapter 2, Figure 2.5 (Page no. 2-7).

Greenbelt development plan is provided in Chapter 10, Section 10.3.5 (Page no. 10-

9).

x. Action plan for rainwater harvesting

measures at plant site shall be submitted to harvest rainwater from

the roof tops and storm water drains to recharge the ground water and

also to use for the various activities

Action plan for rainwater

harvesting is provided in Chapter 2, Section 2.11 (Page

no. 2-36). Detailed rain water harvesting

plan is given in Annexure-VI.




at the project site to conserve fresh

water and reduce the water requirement from other sources.

xi. Total capital cost and recurring cost/

annum for environmental pollution control measures shall be included.

Total capital cost and recurring

cost/annum for environmental pollution control measures is included in Chapter 10, Section

10.5 (Page no. 10-15).

xii. Action plan for post-project environmental monitoring shall be submitted.

Action plan for post-project environmental monitoring is included in Chapter 10, Section

10.4 (Page no. 10-14).

xiii. Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural and Man-made) Preparedness and

Emergency Management Plan including Risk Assessment and damage control. Disaster

management plan should be linked with District Disaster Management

Plan.

Onsite and offsite Disaster (natural and man-made)

Preparedness and Emergency Management Plan is included in Chapter 7, Section 7.11

(Page no 7-27) & 7.12 (Page no 7-33).

8. Occupational health

i. Details of existing Occupational &

Safety Hazards. What are the exposure levels of above mentioned hazards and whether they are within

Permissible Exposure Level (PEL)? If these are not within PEL, what

measures the company has adopted to keep them within PEL so that health of the workers can be

preserved.

Not applicable as this is a new

project proposal.

ii. Details of exposure specific health status evaluation of worker. If the

workers‟ health is being evaluated by pre-designed format, chest x rays, Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision

testing (Far & Near vision, color vision and any other ocular defect)

ECG, during pre-placement and periodical examinations give the details of the same. Details regarding

last month analyzed data of above mentioned parameters as per age,

sex, duration of exposure and department wise.

Not Applicable, as this is a greenfield project.

However, Medical records of each employee will be maintained separately and will

be updated as per finding during monitoring. Age, sex

wise, department wise data on the above parameters will be maintained and submitted to

the ministry. Medical records of the employee at the end of

their term will be updated.

iii. Annual report of health status of workers with special reference to

Occupational Health and Safety.

Not applicable (New project proposal).

iv. Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational health & safety of all contract and casual workers.

Occupational health & safety plan is given in Chapter 10, Section 10.3.6 (Page no. 10-

11); and Chapter 7, Section 7.6 (Page no. 7-19).




Fund allocation is mentioned in

Chapter 10, Section 10.5 (Page no. 10-15).

9. Corporate Environment Policy

i. Does the company have a well laid down Environment Policy approved

by its Board of Directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA report.

Attached as Annexure-VII. Additionally, company will set

up a separate Environment Management Cell and the objectives and duties of it are

discussed in Chapter 10, Section 10.6 (Page no. 10-16).

ii. Does the Environment Policy prescribe for standard operating

process/procedures to bring into focus any infringement/deviation/

violation of the environmental or forest norms/conditions? If so, it may

be detailed in the EIA.

Yes

iii. What is the hierarchical system or

Administrative order of the company to deal with the environmental issues

and for ensuring compliance with the environmental clearance conditions? Details of this system may be given.

It is discussed in Chapter 10,


iv. Does the company have system of

reporting of non-compliances/ violations of environmental norms to

the Board of Directors of the company and/or shareholders or stakeholders at large? This reporting

mechanism shall be detailed in the EIA report.



10. Details regarding infrastructure

facilities such as sanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to be provided to the labor force during construction as

well as to the casual workers including truck drivers during

operation phase.


Section 10.2.2 (Page no. 10-2) and 10.2.4 (Page no. 10-3).

11. Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER)

i. To address the Public Hearing issues, an amount as specified under

Ministry‟s Office Memorandum vide F. No. 22-65/2017-IA.III dated 1st May,

2018 amounting to Rs. ______ crores, shall be earmarked by the project proponent, towards Corporate

Environment Responsibility (CER). Distinct CER projects shall be

prepared on the local public hearing issues. Project estimate shall be

prepared based on PWD schedule rates for each distinct Item and

Unit has allocated an amount of Rs. 5.22 Crore (2.0% of

Total project cost i.e. 261 Crore) towards Corporate

Environment Responsibility (CER). It is included in Chapter 10,

Section 10.9 (Page no. 10-20) & Table 10.4 (Page no. 10-21).




schedule for time-bound action plan

shall be prepared. These CER projects as indicated by the project

proponent shall be implemented along with the main project. Implementation of such program

shall be ensured by constituting a Committee comprising of the project

proponent, representatives of village Panchayat & District Administration. Action taken report in this regard

shall be submitted to the Ministry‟s Regional Office. No free

distribution/donations and or free camps shall be included in the above CER budget.

12. Any litigation pending against the

project and/or any direction/order passed by any Court of Law against

the project, if so, details thereof shall also be included. Has the unit received any notice under the

Section 5 of Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 or relevant

Sections of Air and Water Acts? If so, details thereof and compliance/ATR to the notice(s) and present status of

the case.

No litigation pending against

the project and/or any direction/order passed by any

Court of Law against the project.

13. A tabular chart with index for point wise compliance of above TORs.

Done.

14. The ToRs prescribed shall be valid for a period of three years for

submission of the EIA-EMP reports along with Public Hearing

proceedings (whenever stipulated).

Noted the point

The following general points shall be noted:

i. All documents shall be properly

indexed, page numbered.

Noted and complied

ii. Period/date of data collection shall be

clearly indicated.

Noted and complied

iii. Authenticated English translation of

all material in Regional language

shall be provided.

Noted and complied

iv. The letter/application for

environmental clearance shall quote

the MoEF&CC file no. and also attach

a copy of the letter.

Noted and complied

v. The copy of the letter received from

the Ministry shall be also attached as

an annexure to the final EIA-EMP

Complied.

Letter received from MoEF&CC

is attached as Annexure-X.




report.

vi. The index of the final EIA-EMP report

must indicate the specific chapter

and page no. of the EIA-EMP report.

Noted and complied

vii. While preparing the EIA report, the

instructions for the proponents and

instructions for the consultants

issued by MoEF&CC vide O.M. No. J-

11013/41/2006-IA.II (I) dated 4th

August, 2009, which are available on

the website of this Ministry shall also

be followed.

Instructions were followed.

Undertaking of proponent &

consultant is enclosed as

Annexure-VIII & Annexure-

IX.

viii. The consultants involved in the

preparation of EIA-EMP report after

the accreditation with the Quality

Council of India (QCI)/ National

Accreditation Board of Education and

Training (NABET) would need to

include a certificate in this regard in

the EIA-EMP Report prepared by

them and data provided by other

organization/Laboratories including

their status of approvals etc. Name

of the Consultant and the

Accreditation details shall be posted

in the EIA-EMP report as well as on

the cover of the Hard copy of the

Presentation material for EC

presentation.

San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd. &

Shivalik Solid Waste

Management Limited is

accredited as Category-A

organization under the QCI-

NABET Scheme for preparing

EIA-EMP report.

NABET/QCI certificates of both

the consultants are enclosed

as Annexure-I.

Analysis was performed in

MoEF&CC Recognized

Environmental Laboratory

Under EP Act, 1986.

ix. ToRs prescribed by Expert Appraisal

Committee (Industry) shall be

considered for preparation of EIA-

EMP report for the project in addition

to Appendix III and IIIA in the EIA

Notification, 2006. Where the

documents provided are in a

language other than English, an

English translation shall be provided.

The draft EIA-EMP report shall be

submitted to the state pollution

control board of the concerned state

for conduct of public hearing. The

SPCB shall conduct the public

hearing/public consultation, district-

wise, as per the provision of EIA

Notification, 2006. The public hearing

Noted & complied.

The GPCB has conducted the

public hearing/public

consultation, as per the

provision of EIA Notification,

2006. Copy of MoM is attached

as Annexure-XI and GPCB has

directly sent the MoM of Public

Hearing to MoEFCC, New Delhi.




shall be chaired by an Officer not

below the rank of Additional District

Magistrate.

The issues raised in the Public

Hearing and during the consultation

process and the commitments made

by the project proponent on the

same shall be included separately in

EIA-EMP report in a separate chapter

and summarized in a tabular chart

with financial budget (capital and

revenue) along with time-schedule of

implementation for complying with

the commitments made. The final

EIA report shall be submitted to the

Ministry for obtaining environmental

clearance.

Noted the points of the

condition and shall be

complied.

ANNEXURE-2

METALLURGICAL INDUSTRIES (FERROUS & NON-FERROUS)

i. Complete process flow diagram describing each unit, its processes and operations, along with material

and energy inputs & outputs (material and energy balance).

Complete Process description is given in Chapter-2, Section 2.7 (Page no. 2-12).

Overall flow chart with material balance of raw

materials and products is given in Figure 2.7 (Page no. 2-25). Energy balance is given in

Table 2.8, page no. 2-25 of Chapter-2.

ii. Emission from sulphuric acid plant

and Sulphur muck management.

Not Applicable, unit is not

going to install Sulphuric acid plant.

iii. Details on installation of Continuous Emission Monitoring System with

recording with proper calibration system.

If MoEF&CC enforced as condition in EC then unit will

install Continuous Emission Monitoring System with

recording.

iv. Details on toxic metals including

fluoride emissions.

No such type of emission

envisage from the plant.

v. Details on stack height Detailed Stack height calculation for proposed steel

plant is given in section 2.9.3, page no. 2-27.

vi. Details on ash disposal and management

Details on ash disposal & its management are given in

Table 2.11, page no. 2-31. Fly Ash will be sold to brick manufacturers in the

surrounding areas. Interest letter from brick manufacturer




for utilization of Ash generated

from the proposed project is attached as Annexure-V.

vii. Complete process flow diagram

describing process of lead/zinc/ copper/aluminium, etc.

Not Applicable as no

manufacturing of lead/zinc/ copper/aluminium will be involved.

viii. Details on smelting, thermal refining,

melting, slag fuming, and Waelz kiln operation.

Not Applicable

ix. Details on Holding and de-gassing of molten metal from primary and

secondary aluminum, materials pre-treatment, and from melting and

smelting of secondary aluminium.

Not Applicable as unit is not going to hold and de-gassing

of molten metal.

x. Details on toxic metal content in the

waste material and its composition and end use (particularly of slag).

There will be no usage of any

toxic non-ferrous metal. Typical composition of slag is

given in Table 2.12, page no. 2-31.

Non-hazardous slag will be sold to brick manufacturers/ for road construction.

xi. Trace metals in waste material

especially slag.

Unit is not going use any metal

which contain trace metals like chromium, cobalt, copper, selenium, zinc etc. Hence no

presence of trace metal in slag. Typical composition of

slag is given in Table 2.12, page no. 2-31.

xii. Plan for trace metal recovery There is no presence of trace metal in raw material, hence

not applicable.

xiii. Trace metals in water There is no w/w generation from process and additionally

no presence of trace metal in raw material, hence not applicable.

1.10 LIST OF INDUSTRIES SURROUNDING PROJECT SITE

List of industries within 10 km are shown below.

Name of Industry Activities

Inox Wind Ltd.

NH 8A, Rohika, Nr. Bagodra, Gujarat

Wind blades and tubular towers

manufacturer for wind power

Grainspan Nutrients Private

Limited

Village: Bhamsara, Bavla-Bagodra

Food Products

Alpha Nippon Innovative Limited

Bhamasara, Ahmedabad, Bavla,

Engineering Unit, Precision Metal

Fabrications, Material Handling &




Gujarat Storage Systems

Kankaria Properties Pvt. Ltd.

Ahmedabad-Rajkot Highway,

Bagodara

Brick Manufacturers

1.11 STRUCTURE OF REPORT

The overall contents of the EIA report is in line with generic structure of

EIA report as per the Appendix III of the EIA Notification, 2006. The

report consists of twelve chapters and the content is briefly described in

this section.

Chapter 1: Introduction

This chapter covers purpose of the report, gives brief outline of the

project and its proponent, brief description of nature, size and location

of the project & its importance to country & region, scope of the study,

TORs compliance etc.

Chapter 2: Project Description

This chapter includes project details and Infrastructure facilities

including all industrial & environmental aspects of the unit as well as

manufacturing process details. It also gives information about utilities,

raw material, water & wastewater quantitative details, stack details,

hazardous waste generation, storage & disposal facility.

Chapter 3: Description of the Environment

This chapter covers data of existing condition of Valued Environmental

Components like air, water, noise, soil, biological environment and

socio-economic aspects, basic amenities, land use pattern. It also

gives details of study area, period of study, component of environment

& its methodology. Various sections of the chapter discuss the existing

land use and drainage pattern, climate and meteorological parameters.

Both primary and secondary data collected for the study are depicted

in this chapter.

Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation

Measures

This chapter describes the overall impacts of the project activities on

various environmental components. It predicts the overall impact of




the project activities on different components of the environment viz.

Air, Water, Land, Noise, Biological and Socio-Economic and its

mitigation measures.

Chapter 5: Analysis of Alternatives

This chapter gives details of analysis of alternatives in terms of

technology & site.

Chapter 6: Environmental Monitoring Programme

This chapter describes technical aspects of monitoring (including

measurement methodologies, frequency, location and data analysis,

reporting schedules, detailed budget.

Chapter 7: Additional Studies

This chapter comprises of risk assessment, on-site, off-site emergency

plan and occupational health & safety programme, public consultation,

social impact assessment.

Chapter 8: Project Benefits

This chapter focuses on benefits of project on improvement in physical

infrastructure, social infrastructure & other tangible benefits.

Chapter 9: Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis

Chapter 10: Environmental Management Plan

This chapter describes Environment Management Plan (EMP) to be

adopted for mitigation of anticipated adverse impacts if any and to

ensure acceptable impacts.

Chapter 11: Summary & Conclusion

It gives brief of the EIA Report and chapters there in.

Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants engaged

This chapter describes the name of the consultant engaged with their

brief nature of consultancy activities.




Chapter-2

Project Description

2.1 INTRODUCTION

M/s. Genext Steels Private Limited is a Greenfield project, proposes

establishment of mini integrated steel plant with captive power plant. It

comprises of Pellet plant (Pellets – 800 TPD), DRI Kilns (Sponge Iron -

600 TPD), Steel Melting Shop (MS Billets – 975 TPD), Rolling Mill

(Structural Steel, TMT Bars & Rolled products – 1000 TPD), Power

Generation–12 MW [7 MW through Waste Heat Recovery Boiler (WHRB)

and 5 MW through Fluidized bed Combustion (FBC) Boiler].

The estimated cost of the proposed project is around Rs. 261.0 Crores.

Out of this, around Rs. 40.0 Crores will be invested for pollution control

measures as capital cost and Rs. 8.0 Crores as recurring cost per annum.

Time of project completion will be about 2 years after accordance of the

EC.

As per the EIA Notification, 2006, proposed activity is listed at S. No. 3(a)

Metallurgical Industries (ferrous & non-ferrous) under Category “A”.

Based on the type of project, following are the expected aspects:

Waste water generation,

Air Emissions,

Noise generation,

Solid/Hazardous waste generation, and

Occupational health, hazards & safety risk

2.2 NEED OF THE PROJECT

The steel industry is considered to be an indicator of economic progress

of the country because of the critical role played by steel in infrastructural

and overall economic development.

The Indian steel industry have entered into a new development stage

from 2005-2006, after rising demand for steel in the country. Rapid rise

in production has resulted in India becoming the 4th largest producer of

steel. In the last 5 years, the production and consumption of steel has




grown at exceeding rates of 9% per annum. The pace of growth has

further accelerated in the current year to over 10%.

Today, the Indian steel industry contributes approximately 2% to the

country‟s GDP and employs about 5 lakh people directly and about 20

lakh people indirectly.

The National Steel Policy has envisaged steel production to reach 180

million tonnes by 2020. Further, based on the status of MOUs signed by

the private producers with the various State Governments, it is expected

that India‟s steel capacity would be nearly 293 million tonne by 2020.

This has given the opportunities for the production of Steel in Private

sector. The continued thrust on infrastructure & related activities and

their extension to rural India will provide a tremendous boost to the steel

industry.

In the light of the above scenario, Genext Steels Pvt. Ltd. has proposed

to setup an integrated steel plant.

2.3 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT

The proposed project will be located at Survey Nos. 661, 662, 664, 665,

1822 & 1823, Village: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla, District: Ahmedabad,

State: Gujarat. The coordinates of center of industry are 22°37‟35.22”N

and 72°9‟48.72”E. Location of the project, satellite image and boundary

coordinates of the site are shown in Figure 2.1, Figure 2.2, and Figure

2.3, respectively. Photographs showing location of proposed project site

is enclosed as Annexure-III.

Availability of Water

Total water requirement for the project would be about 1018 KLD. Out of

which; 905 KLD will be fresh water requirement and 113 KLD recycle

water from treated wastewater/domestic water. The water requirement

for the proposed project would be met from Bore well (Ground water

source) and recycle water from treated water.

Availability of Electricity

Total power requirement for the proposed project will be about 57 MW.

This would be met partly from Captive Power Generation units and partly

from State Grid power supply system. In-plant generation of power from




Waste heat recovery would be around 7 MW and 5 MW from Fluidized Bed

Combustion (FBC) Boiler using Coal & Dolochar generated during process

and balance quantity will be imported coal. Balance 45 MW would be

drawn from the Gujarat State Grid Power Supply system.

Transport Linkages State

National Highway-8A which is running through Ahmedabad-Rajkot is

about 0.523 km away from the proposed project site. State Highway, SH-

8 between Bagodara to Vataman is 4.4 km away from the proposed site.

The nearest railway station is Arnej, which is 12.0 km from the proposed

project site. Other nearby railway station is Bavla, about 30.45 km from

the project site. The nearest airport is Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel

International Airport, Ahmedabad at about 67.0 km from the proposed

project site.

Indicating Site Location

A preliminary plant general layout has been developed giving due

consideration to the land configuration and logistics of receipt and

dispatch of materials. A sketch of site location map is presented in

Figure 2.1 below.




Figure 2.1 Location of the project site




Figure 2.2 Satellite image

Figure 2.3 Image showing all boundary coordinates of the site




There are no Reserve Forests, National Parks, Wild life Sanctuaries within

10 Km radius of the project site. Project site is 12.0 km away from the

boundary of Nalsarovar Bird Sanctuary, and 1.9 km away from the

boundary of Eco-Sensitive Zone (ESZ) of Nalsarovar Bird Sanctuary. The

proposed project site does not fall in the ESZ of Nalsarovar Bird

Sanctuary. Site location with respect to both is shown in Figure 2.4.

Figure 2.4 Eco-Sensitive Zone Map of Nalsarovar Bird Sanctuary




2.4 SIZE OR MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION

2.4.1 Land Breakup & Project Site Layout

Proposed land area is 37.82 Acre or 153061 m2. Greenbelt will be

developed in around 50500 m2 area which tunes around 33% of the

project area. The detailed proposed land break up is given below in Table

2.1, whereas the plant layout is given in the Figure 2.5.

Table 2.1: Land use planning

Sr.

No.

Item Area

(m2)

1. Built up area 32375

2. Internal roads 8997

3. Storage yard 20234

4. Greenbelt 50500

5. Parking area 20234

6. Open land 20721

Total 153061

Figure 2.5 Plant Layout




2.4.2 Project Magnitude

Proposed production capacity is given below:

Table 2.2: List of products with its capacity

Sr.

No.

Production Unit Product Plant

Configuration

Production

Capacity



3 Steel Melting

Shop

MS Billets Induction furnace: 4 x 25 MT/heat

CCM: Eight-strand billet

caster

975 TPD



2 x 500 TPD 1000 TPD

5 Power Plant



Table 2.3: Plant facility

Sr.

No.

Unit Facility Capacity &

nos. of unit

1. Pellet Plant Disc Pelletizer/Travelling

Grate

4 x 200 TPD

2. DRI Kilns Rotary Kiln 4 x 150 TPD

Kiln Cooler --

3. Steel Melting

Shop

Induction furnace 4 x 25 MT/heat

Continuous Casting

Machine

8 Strands

4. Rolling Mill Continuous Rolling Mill 2 x 500 TPD

5. Power Plant WHRB 1 x 7 MW

FBC 1 x 5 MW

2.5 INPUT REQUIREMENTS

a) Raw material requirement:

The raw materials will be received through road transport in trucks and

stored in covered storage area. The raw materials will be stored/

inventory will be maintained as per market requirement of the products

and production schedule. Raw materials will be stored on stable layer to

avoid leaching of materials to ground water.




The raw material requirement with source and mode of transport are

given in Table 2.4. Typical trace metal analysis of the raw material is

given in Table 2.5.

Table 2.4 Raw material requirement

Sr.

No.

Name of raw

materials

Quantity

(TPD)

Source Mode of Transport

Pellet Plant

1. Iron Ore fines/

Iron Oxide (Mill Scale)

832 Rajasthan,

Chhattisgarh, Karnataka, Orissa

and Mill scale from rolling mill working

in vicinity

By Truck

(through covered trucks)

2. Bentonite 48 Kutch (Gujarat) By Truck


3. Imported Coal 128 South Africa from Kandla Port

(Gujarat)

By Truck (through covered

trucks)

DRI Kiln

1. Pellets 800 Internal Through covered conveyors


(Gujarat)


trucks)

3. Dolomite 48 Local/Gujarat By Truck (through covered

trucks)

Induction Furnace with Concast

1. Sponge Iron 582 Internal Through covered

conveyors

2. M S Scrap 562 Bhavnagar/Alang Imported


trucks)

3. Ferro Alloys 12.5 Local/Gujarat By Truck


Rolling Mill

1. Billets 1000 Internal Through covered conveyors

For Power Plant [FBC boiler - Power generation 5 MW]

1. Dolochar 100 Internal Through covered

conveyors



trucks)




Table 2.5

Typical compositions of main raw material (Iron-Ore/Iron Oxide)

Sr. No. Parameters Iron Ore result (%)

1. Iron as Fe 62-65

2. SiO2, Al2O3 2-5

3. LOI (Loss of Ignition) 2-3

b) Water requirement:

Total water requirement for the project would be about 1018 KLD. Out of

which; 905 KLD will be fresh water requirement and 113 KLD recycle

water from treated industrial effluent/domestic water wastewater. This

includes water requirement for Pellet Plant (80 KLD), DRI (50 KLD), SMS

(200 KLD), Rolling Mill (200 KLD), Power Plant (220 KLD), Water

treatment (80 KLD), greenbelt (150 KLD), water for ash & dust

suppression (13 KLD) & Domestic (25 KLD). Water requirement of the

project will be sourced from Ground water. Water drawl permission from

CGWA is under process, kindly refer Annexure-II. Detailed break-up of

water consumption and water balance diagram is given in Table 2.6 and

Figure 2.6, respectively.

Table 2.6 Breakup of water consumption & w/w generation

Sr.

No

Water requirement for Water

Consumption

(KLD)

Wastewater

Generation

(KLD)

1 Domestic 25 20

2 Gardening 150 00

3 Industrial

a Water Treatment 80 80

b Pellet plant 80 0.0

c DRI kilns (Cooling) 50 0.0

d Steel Melting Shops (Cooling) 200 0.0

e Rolling Mills (Cooling & TMT) 200 0.0

f Power Plant (Cooling) 50 10

g Power Plant (Boiler) 170 20

h Ash & Dust suppression 13 0.0

Total Industrial 843 110

Total (I+II+III) 1018 130

Recycle water 113 -

Fresh Water Requirements 905 -




Figure 2.6: Water balance diagram

Total water requirement 1018 KLD (Fresh – 905 KLD + Recycle – 113 KLD)

Domestic

25

To STP

20*

Use in Greenbelt

Evaporation

Loss

40

Industrial

830 Greenbelt 20 + 130

Dust suppression 13

Softening

plant 830

Power plant

220

Reject 10 + 20 + 80= 110

80

Cooling 50

Boiler

170

Cooling

Tower for Process

560

10

20

Pellets 80

DRI 50

IF 120

CCM 200

TMT 80

Eva

po

R a t

i o

n Lo

s

s

Slag cooling

15

RO 95

Permeate

75**

MEE 20 Reject

20

Condensate

18**

Salt + Loss 0.5 + 1.5




c) Power:

Total power requirement for the proposed project will be 57 MW, this will

be met partly from the Captive Power Plant and partly from the State

Grid i.e. Gujarat State Electricity Corporation Limited (GSECL).

Total captive power generation = 7 MW (WHRB) + 5 MW (FBC) = 12 MW.

Remaining 45 MW will be procured from the State Grid.

d) Fuel:

Unit proposes to use imported Coal, Dolochar, HSD as fuel. Details of fuel

consumption are given in below Table 2.7.

Table 2.7 Details fuel consumption

Sr. No. Type of fuel Fuel consumption

1. Imported Coal 728 TPD

2. Dolochar 100 TPD

3. HSD 410 lit/hr.

e) Manpower:

The estimated direct manpower requirement for the proposed project will

be around 500-700 numbers; inclusive of staff and security. It will

comprise of 20% of skilled labours, 40% of semi-skilled labors and 40%

of unskilled labours. About 1500 people will get benefit under indirect

employment. Apart from this, the proposed project will encourage local

service providers and ancillary industries.

2.6 PROPOSED SCHEDULE FOR APPROVAL AND IMPLEMENTATION

It has been planned to complete the construction of all facilities within a

total timeframe of 24 months after obtaining statutory clearance.

2.7 TECHNOLOGY & PROCESS DESCRIPTION

The manufacturing technology inter-alia include manufacturing of pellets



Furnace (IF) along with concast; manufacturing of Structural Steel, TMT

bars & Rolled products through continuous Rolling Mill; power generation

through WHRB & FBC Boiler. Above integrated plant technology will be

helpful to conserve around 30% of energy by way of direct hot

material/mass transfer from one process to another process. Waste Heat




will be utilized for power generations which also reduce fuel cost around

25%. Manufacturing process of all products is described below.

1. Pellet Plant

The process of pelletization enables converting Iron Ore Fines/Iron Oxide

(Mill scale) Ore into “Uniformed Sized Iron Ore Pellets” that can be

charged for Production of Direct Reduced Iron (DRI). Pellets are uniform

size, with purity of 63%- 65% contributing to faster reduction and high

metallization rates. Pellets with their high, uniform mechanical strength

and high abrasive strength increase production of sponge iron by 25% to

30% with same amount of fuel.

Process Description

The iron ore pelletization unit comprises of following sections:

a) Drying & Preparation of Iron ore Fines

Generally Iron Ore Fines/Iron Oxide (Mill Scale), Bentonite available

contain more than 6-7% moisture and require drying before grinding. The

drying is carried out in Rotary Drum Dryer. The moisture content in the

dry material is controlled. The Iron Ore Fines is fed in a screen for

separation. Oversize/under size moves to the primary grinding circuit.

b) Grinding

Iron Ore Fines, Bentonite are mixed in required proportion and fed into a

Ball Mill. The fineness of the product is controlled as may be necessary

for particular ore and Pellet quality.

c) Mixing and Blending

Iron Ore powder is blended with Bentonite and other binding materials in

desired proportion to get desired consistency. Small quantity of water is

added during blending operation. This raw mix is ready for Pellet making

and stored in feed hopper.

d) Pelletization

Controlled quantity of raw mix is fed on disc Pelletizer. Some amount of

water is sprinkled for producing Pellets. These Pellets are passed through

oversize and undersize screens. Sized Pellets are then sent to sintering

section.




e) Screening

Pellets produce in Pelletization sections are passed through oversize and

undersize screens. Rejects Pellets are sent back to raw mix silos and

sized Pellets are fed into Indurations Furnace.

f) Travel Grate Furnace

A Travel Grate Furnace is used for drying of Pellets. This is divided into 3

sections (Drying – Preheating - Heating). Hot Pellets at around 950ºC to

1000ºC from this Travel Grate are dropped into the Kiln for further

strengthening/Induration.

g) Rotary Kiln

Rotary Kiln receives Pellets from the grate kiln where Pellets have to

withstand a high temperature approx. 1050ºC – 1200ºC. Here the Pellets

gain more hardness due to high temperature. Imported coal is used as a

fuel inside the Kiln. After the Kiln, the Pellets are passed to the Grate

Cooler.

h) Cooler

Grate Cooler receives hot Pellet with temperature up to 1200ºC coming

from Rotary Kiln. Cooler has its own blowers to blast the air from bottom.

The hot air from the first zone is used as combustion air in kiln. The hot

blast of the second zone is used in the pre-heating zone-1 of travel grate

and the air from the 3rd zone is discharged to the atmosphere through

chimney after passing through bag filter. Volume of cooling air in all the

three zones is regulated automatically through the temperature control

loops as per the requirement. Cold Pellets are discharged on conveyors

and then conveyed to the stock pile/loading hoppers.

i) Stacking

The screened Pellets of required size duly cooled at air cooler and

subsequently natural cooling are transported to Bunkers.

j) Recovery of Dust and Spillage

Spillage from drying zone and preheating zone of traveling grate, dust

from the wind box of traveling grate and dust collected through de-duster

of technological process will be sent to dust bin via belt conveyor, after

they are ground together with iron ore concentrate at grinding mill.




Spillage (dry Pellets) produced at the discharge end of traveling grate will

be fed into the kiln from the feed chute of the kiln feed end by bucket

elevation. Almost all the dust & spillage are re-circulated and recovered.

Material Balance

Inputs Outputs

Name Qty. (TPD) Name Qty. (TPD)

Iron Ore fines/Iron

Oxide (Mill Scale)

832 Pellets 800

Bentonite 48 Gases 176

Imported Coal 128 Dust/Ash 32

Total 1008 Total 1008

Pelletization Process




2. DRI Kiln Based Sponge Iron Plant

The Direct Reduced Iron (DRI) plant will comprise of 4 x 150 TPD Kiln and

related accessories including Waste Heat Recovery power generating unit.

Process Description

The major plant facilities for the Sponge Iron plant are as follows:

• Day bins

• Rotary Kiln & Cooler

• Central Control Room

• Product processing and product storage

• Off gas system including waste heat recovery power generation

Process flow sheet of sponge iron plant




The day bin building will have bins for meeting raw material required for

kiln. This bin will have the storage facility for pellets, feed coal, dolomite

etc. A refractory lined rotary kiln will be used for reduction of Pellets in

solid state. A central Burner located at the discharge end will be used for

initial heating of the kiln. Sized Pellets will be continuously fed into the

kiln along with coal which has dual role of fuel as well as reductant.

Dolomite will be added to scavenge the Sulphur from the coal. A number

of air tubes will be provided along the length of the kiln. The desired

temperature profile will be maintained by controlling the volume of the

combustion air through these tubes. The carbon monoxide generated due

to the combustion of coal, reduces the pellets and converts it into sponge

iron. The rotary kiln is primarily divided into two zones viz. the pre

heating zone and the reduction zone. The preheating zone extends over

30 to 50% of the length of the kiln and in this the moisture in the charge

will be driven off and the volatile matter in the coal will be burnt with the

combustion air supplied through the air tubes. Heat from the combustion

raises the temperature of the lining and the bed surface. As the kiln

rotates, the lining transfers the heat to the charge. Charge material, pre-

heated to about 1000oC enters the reduction zone. Temperature of the

order of 1050oC will be maintained in the reduction zone, which is the

appropriate temperature for solid state reduction of iron oxide to metallic

iron. This hot material will be transferred to rotary cooler. In rotary cooler

the material will cool from 1000oC to 100oC in cooler by spraying water.

The cooler discharge material consists of sponge iron lumps, sponge iron

fines and dolochar. Magnetic and non-magnetic material will be separated

through magnetic separators and stored in separate bins.

Reaction/operation involved in process of sponge iron production

C + O2 CO2

CO2 + C 2CO

3Fe2O3 + 2CO + O2 2Fe3O4 + 2CO2

CO2 + C 2CO

Fe3O4 +CO 3FeO + CO2

CO2 + C 2CO




FeO + CO Fe + CO2

Material Balance

Inputs Outputs


Pellets 800 Sponge Iron 600

Imported Coal 570 Dolochar 100

Dolomite 48 Flue gases 718


3. Steel Melting Shop (SMS)

In Steel Melting Shop (SMS), Sponge Iron will be melted along with

melting scrap and fluxes to make pure liquid steel and then to mould it in

required size billets. The SMS will consist of following equipment and

subassemblies: There will be 4 nos. of 25 T/heat Induction Furnaces in

the SMS plant. MS Billets will be produced in Continuous Casting Machine.

Induction Furnace with Concast (MS Billets)




Process Description

Material handling: Sponge Iron, M.S Scrap and ferro alloys are

transferred from material godown to furnace by close conveyor through

feeder. Then it is charged into Induction Furnace. Here movable suction

hood will be provided to suck fugitive emission if any. The major plant

facilities are as follows:

a) Induction Furnace

Induction Furnaces is a device to melt the charge material using electrical

power. It consists of Crucible consisting of water cooled induction coils

lined with refractory material lined with water cooled induction coils,

Electrical system to give controlled power to induction coil, Hydraulic

tilting system, cooling tower to cool the circulating water, water softener

for generating soft water, furnace transformer, Power Factor

improvement system and surge suppressor.

b) Ladles

Ladles are pots with refractory lining inside to withstand 17500C

temperature. It has side arms so that it can be lifted with the help of

crane. Ladles are used to store the liquid steel from Induction Furnace

and take it for further processing. Ladles are with bottom nozzle and

pneumatically operated gate for discharge of liquid.

c) Cranes

Electric Over-head (EOT) cranes of various capacities are used to carry

the ladles/materials at different places. Cranes are used in Melting hall to

charge melting scrap, further place it over the Tundish of the Continuous

Caster, to remove billets from the cooling bed and store at designated

places, and also for other petty use.

Slag Composition:

Sr. No. Parameters Result (%)

1. MnO 17.9

2. FeO 0.82

3. CaO 26.2

4. MgO 8.9

5. SiO2 25.8

6. Al2O3 10.9




d) Continuous Casting Machine (CCM)

8 stands CCM are used to continuously cast the liquid steel in required

cross section and in length of billets. It consists of Tundish, Mould, Bow

with Withdrawal mechanism, straightening mechanism and hydraulic

system for withdrawal mechanism, water pumps and cooling towers for

water spray on the withdrawn section as well as on the cooling bed.

Dummy bar is provided to start the casting. Tundish is a rectangular

vessel, lined with refractory and having discharge nozzle with

pneumatically operated gate. A stand is erected over it where the ladle is

stationed for discharging the liquid in it. Mould is of copper with water

cooled jacketed. Its cross-section in the bottom is of the size of which

billet is to be drawn. Initially the dummy for of the same size is kept

inserted. When the liquid steel is poured in the mould, the dummy bar is

drawn slowly, so that the liquid steel in partially skin frozen state comes

out of the mould. Water spray nozzles are installed to spray water over

the just drawn billet to cool it further and to harden the drawn billet in

entirety.

Flow diagram of Continuous Casting Machine (CCM)




Material Balance

Inputs Outputs


Sponge Iron 600 MS Billets 1000

M S Scrap 562 SMS Slag 90

Ferro Alloys 12.5 Flue Gases 84.5

Total 1174.5 Total 1174.5

4. ROLLING MILL

In the proposed project, 2 x 500 TPD capacity Rolling Mill will be installed

for producing 975 TPD of Bars, Rods and Structural Steel, Rolled

Products. Facility for direct charging of red hot billets from continuous

casting to the rolling mill is envisaged.

Process Description

A cross country type continuous Rolling Mill has been envisaged for the

plant. The stands have been grouped into roughing, intermediate and

finishing groups. Roughing group will have 4 (four) stands, intermediate

group will have 8 (eight) stands and finishing mill will have 8 (eight)

stands. Roughing group of stands will be driven by one motor. 4 nos. of

intermediate stands will be driven by two motors and balance 4 nos. will

be driven by a separate motor. Each stand of finishing group will be

driven by single motor. Necessary guides and troughs will be provided at

entry and exit of mill stands.

Automated tilting, drop type tilter and feeding arrangement will be

provided in roughing group of stands. Repeaters have been provided in

roughing/intermediate stands as necessary.

Design provision has been made for introduction of slit rolling facility in

future. The rebars discharged from the mill will pass through a water

cooling system comprising cooling pipes with high pressure water nozzles

for rapid water quenching. At the cooling pipes the bar skin temperature

will be reduced to about 600oC. The core of the bar still remains hot. This

Hot Steel

billets From

CCM

Continuous

Rolling Mill

Structural

steels TMT

bars

Rolled Products




entrapped heat tempers the bar. This thermo-mechanical treatment of

the bars increases tensile strength without adversely effecting weldability

and elongation properties. This process eliminates requirement of cold

twisting of bars for production of rebars.

A dividing shear, to cut the products to cooling bed length, will be located

immediately after the water cooling system. This shear will divide all

products to cooling bed lengths. Rake type cooling beds have been

envisaged to receive the rolled product. Cooling bed will be provided with

incoming and outgoing roller tables. One cold shear has been provided to

cut the bars coming out of cooling bed into commercial length of 6 to 12

m. The rolled products will be formed into bundles and will be strapped

by strapping machine manually.

The finished products will be removed by overhead EOT crane and stored

in the storage area or dispatched through road vehicles.

Material Balance

Inputs Outputs


MS Billets 1000 Rolled Products 975

Mill Scales 25


5. Power Plant

Unit proposed to install 7 MW WHRB & 5 MW FBC based power plant for

captive use.

A. WHRB Power Plant:

Production of sponge iron in DRI kiln generates huge quantities of hot

flue gases carrying considerable sensible heat. The energy content of

these gases can effectively be used to generate electric power as well as

steam for meeting various process requirements. Thus a WHRB (Waste

Heat Recovery Boiler) power plant would be an ideally suited proposition

to effectively make use of this waste gas. This WHRB Power plant would

not only make the plant independent of external source of electric power

to some extent and availability of steam for process purpose but would

also result in energy conservation and environment protection.




Steam Turbo-generators (STGs) envisaged for the Power plant will be

single cylinder, multistage, extraction – cum – condensing type complete

with condenser, air evacuation system, 2 x 100% condensate extraction

pumps, electronic governing system, lubricating oil system, regenerative

feed heating system etc. The turbine will be fed with steam generated

from HRSG in DR kiln. The STGs will be located in the machine hall of the

power plant.

Flow Diagram of WHR based Turbo/Turbine Generator

B. FBC Power Plant

The unit will have one FBC boiler connected to 5 MW Steam Turbine

Generator. The boiler will be designed for continuous operation at Turbine

Maximum Continuous Rating (TMCR). A margin of 10% over TMCR shall

be taken into account to arrive at boiler rated capacity. The boiler will be

natural circulation, fluidized bed combustion, two pass, non-reheat, single

drum, balanced draft, semi- outdoor type. The boiler will have continuous

evaporation rating of approx. 360 tonnes/hr. (BMCR shall not be less than

110% of TMCR) with steam parameters at super heater outlet as 98

kg/cm2 and 5400C (± 50C). The feed water temperature at MCR at inlet

Waste Heat

Recovery Boiler

(WHRB)

Alternator 7 MW

Air Cooler

Condenser

Feed water pump

Turbine




to economizer is expected to be around 230 degree C. Steam parameter

are to be fine-tuned at Boiler outlet based on actual plant layout and

piping arrangement. The boiler will be complete with ash/solid separator,

economizer, air pre-heater, ducting, FD fans, ID fans and PA fans. Air

cooled condensers envisaged for Power plant to conserve water.




Figure 2.7

Overall flow chart with material balance of raw materials and products

Table 2.8: Energy Balance

Sr. No.

Plant Power Consumption Power Requirement

(MW)

1 Pellet Plant 150 Kwh/ton 5.0

2 DRI Kiln 140 Kwh/ton 3.5

3 Induction Furnace based Steel Melting

Shop

953 Kwh/ton 40.0

4 Rolling Mill 143 Kwh/ton 6.0

5 Power

plant

WHRB Aux. Consumption @12% 1.5

FBC Aux. Consumption @20% 1.0

Total 57.0




2.8 UTILITIES AND AUXILIARY SERVICES

The under mentioned utilities and auxiliary services for all the production

facilities are proposed to be installed.

Water treatment system

Compressed air system

Air separation system

Fuel system

Firefighting Facilities

Ventilation and Air conditioning system

Laboratory facilities

Workshop facilities

2.9 GENERATION OF POLLUTANTS

The sources of generation of pollutants are given below;

2.9.1 Wastewater Generation

Total effluent generation from project (excluding sewage) will be 110

m3/day. There will be no process wastewater generation from the Pellet,

DRI, SMS & Rolling Mill processes, as closed-circuit cooling system will be

provided. Only source of wastewater generation will be Boiler blow down,

cooling bleed off, & reject from DM plant regeneration. Domestic

wastewater generation will be 20 KLD. Water balance diagram is given in

Figure 2.6.

2.9.2 Gaseous Emission

Non-Point Fugitive Dust Emission Control:

The proposed project is planned to adopt adequate Air Pollution Control

methods as detailed below:

In the raw materials handling section comprising stockpiles, conveyor

transportation, sizing of materials etc., the fugitive dusts thus generated

will be arrested by employing covered conveyor, water sprinkling.

For work area cleaning, suction hood with adequate capacity connect with

Bag filter of adequate capacities and efficiencies will be installed. Thus,

the fugitive dust emissions from various non-point sources will be

controlled by Dust Extraction (DE) systems connect with Bag filter and

water sprinkling.




Point Source emission:

Flue gas emission will be from stack attached with Pellet plant, stack of

DRI Kiln, Induction furnace, FBC boiler & WHRB boiler. Fuel consumption

details are given in below table.

Stacks:

Stack heights for all the facilities in the Steel Plant would range from 11

m to 75 m depending on the emission volume and pollutants loading.

The details of the stacks and emission quality of stacks are given in

Table 2.9 and Table 2.10, respectively.

2.9.3 Stack height calculation for all plants

For pellet plant

Fuel : Imported coal

Fuel Consumption : 32 TPD

Sulphur content in coal : 0.5%

Sulphur Dioxide emission : 32 x 1000 x 0.005 x 2/24

: 13.33 kg/hr.

Stack height (m) : 14 (Q)0.3

14 (13.33)0.3

14 x 2.175 = 30.45 m say 31.0 m proposed 31.0 m

DRI Kiln


Fuel Consumption : 142.5 TPD


Total Sulphur Dioxide emission (kg/hr.): 142.5 x 1000 x 0.005 x 2/24

: 59.375 kg/hr.


14 (59.375)0.3

14 x 3.40 = 47.6 m say 48.0 m, proposed 48.0 m

OR

Power Plant - WHRB




Total Sulphur Dioxide emission (kg/hr.): 570 x 1000 x 0.005 x 2/24

: 237.5 kg/hr.





14 (237.5)0.3

14 x 5.16 = 72.24 m say 75.0

If we start Power Plant – WHRB later on then separate stack of DRI Kiln

is required hence we have give two options

Power Plant - FBC




Total Sulphur Dioxide emission (kg/hr.): 30 x 1000 x 0.005 x 2/24

: 12.5 kg/hr.


14 (12.5)0.3

14 x 2.13 = 29.87 m say 30.0

Table 2.9 Details of stacks

Sr.

No.

Stack

attached

to

Stack

Height

(m)

Fuel

Type

Fuel

consumption

rate

APCM Probable

pollutants

Pellet Plant

1. Pellet Plant

Kiln-1

31.0 Imported Coal

32 TPD Bag

filters

PM <50 mg/NM3

SO2 <100 ppm

NOX <50 ppm 2. Pellet Plant

Kiln-2

31.0 32 TPD Bag

filters

3. Pellet Plant

Kiln-3

31.0 32 TPD Bag

filters

4. Pellet Plant

Kiln-4

31.0 32 TPD Bag

filters

5. D G Set

(300 kVA x

4 nos.)

(Stand by)

11.0

each

HSD 120 lit/hr.

each

-- PM <50 mg/NM3

SO2 <100 ppm

NOX <50 ppm

DRI Plant

1. Rotary

Kiln-1*

48.0 Imported Coal

142.5 TPD ESP PM <50 mg/NM3

SO2 <100 ppm

NOX <50 ppm 2. Rotary

Kiln-2* 48.0 142.5 TPD ESP

3. Rotary

Kiln-3* 48.0 142.5 TPD ESP

4. Rotary

Kiln-4* 48.0 142.5 TPD ESP

*Above stack will be immediately install with APCM and after fully utilization of DRI kiln

and start power generation from waste heat recovery, then we will discontinue above

stacks.

OR




WHRB

boiler

(30 TPH)

75.0 Waste gas

generated

from

imported

coal in

DRI kiln

570 TPD

(Source Fuel)

ESP PM <30 mg/NM3

SO2 <100 ppm

NOX <50 ppm

5. D G Set

(750 kVA x

4 nos.)

(Stand by)

15.0

each

HSD 170 lit/hr.

each

-- PM <150 mg/NM3

SO2 <100 ppm

NOX <50 ppm

SMS Plant

1. Induction

furnace-1

30.0 Electricity -- 4 sets of

Fume Extraction

system with bag

filters

PM <50 mg/NM3

2. Induction

furnace-2

30.0 --

3. Induction

furnace-3

30.0 --

4. Induction

furnace-4

30.0 --

5. D G Set

(300 kVA x

4 nos.)

(Stand by)

11.0

each

HSD 120 lit/hr.

each

-- PM <150 mg/NM3

SO2 <100 ppm

NOX <50 ppm

Power plant

1. FBC Boiler

(25 TPH)

30.0 Imported Coal &

DoloChar

30 TPD

&

100 TPD

ESP PM <30 mg/NM3

SO2 <100 ppm

NOX <50 ppm

DRI Plant -process area cleaning vents

1. Vent of

process

area

cleaning

for Rotary

Kiln-1

5 Nos.

11.0

each

-- -- Dust Extraction

system with bag

filters

PM <45 mg/NM3

2. Vent of

process

area

cleaning

for Rotary

Kiln-2

5 Nos.

11.0

each


system with bag

filters

PM <45 mg/NM3

3. Vent of

process

area

cleaning

for Rotary

Kiln-3

5 Nos.

11.0

each


system

with bag filters

PM <45 mg/NM3

4. Vent of

process

area

cleaning

for Rotary

Kiln-4

5 Nos.

11.0

each


system

with bag filters

PM <45 mg/NM3




Table 2.10 Estimated air emission Quality

Sr.

No.

Stack attached to Stack

Height

(m)

Temp.

(0C)

Velocity

(m/s)

Dia.

(m)

Concentration

(mg/Nm3)

SPM SO2 NOx

1 Pellet Plant, Kiln-1 31.0 100 5.5 1.00 30 35 30




5 D G Set (300 kVA x 4

nos.) (Stand by)

11

each

180 15.0 0.30 55 25 35

6 Rotary Kiln-1 48.0 150 5.0 1.80 30 35 30

7 Rotary Kiln-2 48.0 150 5.0 1.80 30 35 30

8 Rotary Kiln-3 48.0 150 5.0 1.80 30 35 30

9 Rotary Kiln-4 48.0 150 5.0 1.80 30 35 30

10 D G Set (750 kVA x 4

nos.) (Stand by)

15

each

180 15.0 0.375 55 25 35

11 Induction furnace-1 30.0 100 5.5 1.00 35 -- --




15 D G Set (300 kVA x 4

nos.) (Stand by)

11.0

each

180 15.0 0.375 55 25 35

16 WHRB boiler 75.0 150 7.5 2.00 25 45 40

17 FBC Boiler 30.0 150 7.5 1.20 30 45 40

18 Vent of process area

cleaning for Rotary

Kiln-1, 5 Nos.

11.0

each

100 5.0 0.450 35 -- --


cleaning for Rotary

Kiln-2, 5 Nos.

11.0

each

100 5.0 0.450 35 -- --


cleaning for Rotary

Kiln-3, 5 Nos.

11.0

each

100 5.0 0.450 35 -- --


cleaning for Rotary

Kiln-4, 5 Nos.

11.0

each

100 5.0 0.450 35 -- --

2.9.4 Hazardous and Solid waste generation

Hazardous waste generation:

Main sources of hazardous waste generation will be ETP sludge (5

MT/month), MEE salt (13 MT/month), used lubricating oil (5.0 Kl/year),

discarded drums/containers (500 nos./month). Details are summarized in

below table.

Solid waste generation:

The solid wastes generation from proposed steel plant and its utilization

is summarized in below Table.




Table 2.11: Details of Hazardous & Solid waste

Sr.

No.

Type of

Waste

Category

of Waste

Quantity Disposal facility

Hazardous waste

1. ETP Sludge

&

MEE salt

35.3 5.0

MT/month

13

MT/month

Collection, Storage, Transportation &

disposed at TSDF site.

2. Used

Lubricating

oil

5.1 5.0

Kl/year

Collection, Storage, Transportation

and sale to Registered re-processors

3. Discarded

Drums

& containers

33.1 500

Nos./month

Collection, Storage, Transportation,

decontamination and sale to

registered recyclers

Solid waste

Pellet Plant:

1. Ash -- 32 TPD Collection, Storage and sold to brick

manufacturing units.

Sponge Iron Plant

1. Ash -- 36 TPD Collection, Storage and sold to

Cement Plants & Brick manufacturers.

2. Dolochar -- 100 TPD Collection, Storage and used in FBC

power plant/brick manufacturing

units.

Induction Furnace

1. Slag -- 90 TPD Slag from SMS will be crushed and

iron will be recovered & then

remaining non–magnetic material will

be sold to brick manufacturers/for

road construction.

Rolling Mill

1. Mill Scale -- 25 TPD Will be reused in the Pellet Plant

Power Plant

1. Ash from

power plant

-- 1.5 TPD Ash will be sold to Cement Plants/

Bricks manufacturers

Composition of slag

The slag does not contain any toxic chemicals. Composition slag is given

below.

Table 2.12 Range of chemical compositions in slag

Sr.

No.

Parameters Chemical

composition (%)

1. FeO 12-15

2. SiO2 + Al2O3 85-90




2.9.5 Noise generation

Main source of noise generation will be operation of pumps, compressors,

exhausters, turbines, boiler, blowers, compressors, mill machineries etc.

Intermittent noise would arise from the steam ejection and impacts due

to metal to metal contact, during handling of scraps and finished metal

products.

2.10 POLLUTION CONTROL STRATEGY

The unit is equally conscious about the pollution control strategy. The

details of pollution control strategy for various parameters are given

hereunder,

2.10.1 Effluent Management

There will be no wastewater generation from the Pellet, DRI, SMS &

Rolling Mill processes, as closed-circuit recirculation cooling system

will be provided.

Only source of wastewater generation will be cooling tower bleed

off, boiler blow down & DM plant regeneration and sewage.

Effluent from power plant will be treated in ETP and after ensuring

compliance with SPCB norms, partly utilized for slag cooling &

partly sent to RO followed by MEE.

Sewage will be treated in Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) and

treated water will be utilized for Greenbelt development.

EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT (POWER PLANT)

pH of the boiler blow down will be between 9.5 to 10.5. Hence a

neutralization tank will be constructed for neutralizing the effluent of

boiler blow down, DM plant regeneration water. After neutralization,

these two effluent streams will be mixed with Cooling Tower bleed off in a

Central Monitoring Basin (CMB). Then, part of the effluent will be directly

reused for slag cooling (15 KLD) and part of it (95 KLD) will be passed

through RO. RO eject will be taken to Multi Effect Evaporator (MEE). RO

permeate (75 KLD) and Condensate of MEE (18 KLD) will be reused in

utility. No effluent will be let out of the plant premises. Hence, unit will

achieve Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD). Sewage will be treated in




Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) and treated water will be utilized for

Greenbelt development. Effluent characteristics are given below:

Table 2.13: Characteristics of effluent

Sr. No.

Parameters Unit Result

Untreated Treated

1 pH -- 9.5-10.5 6.5-7.5

2 TSS mg/L 150-200 50-70

3 TDS mg/L 5000-6000 5000-6000

4 Copper mg/L <0.01 <0.01

5 Iron mg/L <0.01 <0.01

6 Zinc mg/L <0.01 <0.01

ETP Flow diagram

Table 2.14 Details of ETP units

Sr. No. Unit Dimension Capacity (m3)

1 Collection Tank 5.25 x 5.25 x 4.5 (4.0 WD)

110.25

2 Neutralization tank 2.5 x 2.5 x 3.5 (3.0 WD)

18.75

3 Settling tank 8 x 4 x 2.5

(1.5 SD)

Surface area 32 m2

4 Treated effluent

sump/basin

5.25 x 5.25 x 4.5

(4.0 WD)

110.25

5 Sludge Drying bed 10 x 5 x 1.5 Surface area 50 m2

6 RO 2 set 5 m3/hr. each

7 MEE 1 1 m3/hr.

Neutralization

Tank

Boiler Blow down

DM plant regeneration

CMB Cooling

Tower bleed

off

Part of the treated

water used for

slag cooling

RO

MEE

Permeate utilize for utility

Condensate reuse in utility

Collection

Tank

Settling

Tank Sludge to

SDB




2.10.2 Air Pollution Control Measures

Air Pollution Control (APC) Measures

Dust emissions would take place due to combustion of fuel from various

furnaces and kilns. The dust laden waste flue gases would be cleaned

either by ESP or Bag Filters. Dolo dusts of the respective kiln combustion

flues would be arrested in Bag filters. There would also be dust emission

from Dust Extraction (DE) stacks, which would be controlled by Bag

Filter.

The flue gases from the Pellet plant will be controlled by high efficiency

Bag filter and then discharged into the atmosphere through stack of 31 m

height.

Flue gases from Rotary kiln of DRI plant will be passed through Electro

Static Precipitators (ESPs) and then discharged into the atmosphere

through stack of 48.0 m height.

Flue gases from DRI kiln will pass through Waste Heat Recovery Boiler

and after heat recovery; the gases will be treated in high efficiency ESPs

to bring down the particulate emission in the exhaust gases to below 30

mg/Nm3 and then discharged into the atmosphere through stack of 75 m

height.

The Fugitive emissions from the Induction furnaces will be sucked

through hoods and will pass through a fume extraction system with bag

filters and then the treated gases will be discharged into the atmosphere

through 4 nos. of stacks each of 30.0 m height for effective dispersion of

emissions from Induction Furnaces. The outlet dust emission in the

exhaust gases will be less than 50 mg/Nm3.

The flue gases from the FBC boiler will be treated in a high efficiency ESP

to bring down the particulate emission to less than 30 mg/Nm3 and will

be discharged through a stack of 30.0 m height for effective dispersion of

emissions into the atmosphere.

Furthermore, facility for sampling such as ladder, platform and sampling

point will be provided as per the GPCB guidelines. The details of stacks

with their APC measures & height are given in Table 2.9.




2.10.3 Fugitive Emission Control

To control the fugitive emissions generated during various operations in

the industry, unit will adopt following mitigation measures.

Raw material will be stored in the covered structure

Unit will provide dust suction system to control fugitive emission

generated from melting of scrap.

Unit will provide dust suppression system (water sprinklers) in coal

unloading area and other bulk material handling areas.

Coal conveying will be done by using covered coal conveyers to

prevent flying of dust during conveying.

Fly ash will be stored in covered sheds only.

All the internal roads will be paved/concreted

Greenbelt will be developed around the plant to arrest the fugitive

emission.

Frequent work area monitoring will be done ensure fugitive emissions

level.

2.10.4 Hazardous & Solid Waste Management

Entire quantity of hazardous waste will be handled & disposed as per

Hazardous & Other waste (Management & Transboundary Movement)

Rules, 2016. ETP sludge & MEE salt will be disposed to approve TSDF site

for landfilling. Used oil will be sold to registered re-processors. Discarded

Drums/containers will be sold to registered recyclers. The unit will

provide isolated area with impervious flooring & roof cover for the storage

of hazardous waste.

Ash will be sold to brick manufacturing units. Dolochar will be used in FBC

power plant as fuel/ sold to brick manufacturing units. Slag after crushing

and iron removal, will be used in road construction/brick manufacturing

units. Mill scale will be reused in the Pellet Plant.

Details of solid and hazardous waste disposal methods are given in Table

2.11.




2.10.5 Noise Pollution Control Measures

During the operation phase of the project, the major noise generating

sources in the plant will be turbine, boiler, feed pumps, steam blowing

from boiler, operation of furnace, material handling used and vehicular

movement. All machinery will be manufactured as per MoEF/OSHA &

other international standards on noise levels. In order to mitigate the

continuous noise within the working area, measures like selection of low

noise prone rotary equipment and vibration dampening would be one of

the plant design aspects. Acoustic enclosure is provided to Turbines. In

addition, noisy equipment would be housed separately. Operational

people would run those noise prone machines from the sound proof

control room/cabins. Steam ejectors would be provided with silencers.

Thick greenbelt will be developed around the periphery of the plant. With

all these mitigation measures, it is planned to have work zone noise level

of Leq for continuous 8 hours duration within 85 dB (A), if measured at 3

m distance from the noise emitting source. Ear muff, ear plug will be

provided to all workers working at noisy area.

2.11 RAIN WATER HARVESTING

Unit proposed to collect all the rain water falling on the terrace through

the rain water down takes which shall be grouped and taken into a rain

water harvesting tank with bypass arrangement for first wash rinse as

well as to bypass into the storm water drain. All drainage system will be

concreted lined and located along the roads up to rain water harvesting

pit. Roof top rain water will be collected in tanks and reused after

filtration as per requirements. Detailed calculation of rain water

harvesting is given in Annexure-VI.

2.12 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT

Total land area of the project is 153061.0 m2. The unit will develop

greenbelt in area of 50500 m2, which will be 33% of the total area of the

project. Thick greenbelt all along the roads and plant periphery will be

developed.




2.13 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY

The company is concerned with the health, safety and environment

protection. The company will formulate and develop an „Occupational

Health & Safety Policy‟ to ensure good health and safety of its employees.

Following key safety measures shall be a part of the Health & Safety

policy of the company and shall be followed after the project

implementation:

Safety Training shall be provided to the employees.

Safety Sirens with Alarm System in case of emergency shall be

provided.

Fire Hydrant System shall be installed.

Fire Extinguishers shall be provided.

Mock drills shall be periodically conducted and factors like response

time shall be evaluated.

First Aid Facility and training shall be provided.

Personnel protective Equipment shall be provided to the employees.

Health check-ups shall be organized at regular intervals.

Safety/Health records shall be maintained.




Table: 2.15

Technical specification of Induction Furnace

Particular Specification

Capacity 25 Tons per Heat

Alloys to be melted Mild Steel

Melt Temperature 1600°C

Main Panel Static frequency Converter

Furnace Transformer 13 MVA

Rated Converter Capacity 750 x 4

Maximum Inverter Capacity 5000V

Nominal Furnace Frequency 500 Hz

Line Power Factor 0.999

KVA required at Input 10000

Melt rate at 10000 KW 25 kg per KW

Power connection Dy/11

Style of Furnace Induction

Pouring Mechanism Hydraulic Tilting

Furnace lining Acidic

Interlock system Provided

Table: 2.16

Technical specification of ESP

Sr.

No.

Parameters Unit Value

1 Nos. of ESP 6 --

2 Gas flow rate per kiln m3/hr. 70000

3 Flue gas temperature 0C 200

4 Inlet dust concentration mg/Nm3 21000

5 Outlet dust concentration mg/Nm3 <30

6 Design Pressure 800

7 Number of fields -- 3

8 Pressure drop across the ESP MMWC 25

9 Collection efficiency % 99.9




Table: 2.17

Typical Technical specification of Bag filter

Sr.

No.

Particulars Unit Specification

1 Application - Pellet/DRI plant/SMS

2 Fuel - Imported Coal

3 Bulk density of Ash Kg/m3 540

4 Operation - Pulse Jet

5 Operating Temp. Deg C 100 to 150

6 Equipment - ASA (as specified above)

7 Capacity m3/hr. 50,000

8 Air to cloth ratio m3/min/m2 1.54

9 Inlet gas temperature Deg. C 150

10 Inlet dust loading gm/m3 2

11 Outlet dust emission mg/Nm3 50

12 Pressure drop across the

Bag Filter (flange to

flange) – max

Mm wg 50

13 Casing design pressure MMWC 600

14 Casing design temperature Deg. C. 250

15 Bag specifications

a Material - Polyester

b Bag Fitting - Vertical

c Sp. Weight g/m2 750

d Thickness mm 1.8

e Bag Size mm 3010

f No. of bags Nos. 250 in each module

g Filter Area per bag m2 1.187

h Total filtering area m2 297




Chapter-3

Description of Environment

3.1 GENERAL

To assess environmental impacts from proposed project at a specific

location, it is essential to monitor the existing environmental quality

prevailing in the surrounding area prior to implementation of the project.

The environmental status within the impact zone could be used for

identification of significant environmental issues to be addressed in the

impact assessment study. Baseline data generation forms a part of the

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study and helps to evaluate the

predicted impacts on the various environmental attributes in the study

area by using scientifically developed and widely accepted impact

assessment methodologies. This section contains the description of

baseline studies of 10 km radius surrounding the project site. The

baseline study was carried out to understand following environmental

parameters.

Land Environment

Meteorology

Air Environment

Water Environment

Soil Environment

Noise Environment

Biological Environment

Socio-economic Environment

The data collected has been used to understand the existing environment

scenario around the project site against which the potential impacts of

the proposed project can be assessed.

3.2 STUDY AREA

The project site is located at Survey Nos. 661, 662, 664, 665, 1822 &

1823, Village: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla, District: Ahmedabad, Gujarat. An

area of 10 km radius from the boundary of the project site is considered

as study area for the EIA study as per the TOR issued by MoEF&CC.




Table 3.1 Environmental setting of the study area

Features Details

Location Vill: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla,

Dist: Ahmedabad

Coordinates of centre

of project site

Latitude: 22°37‟35.22”N

Longitude: 72° 9‟48.72”E


Topography Plain


Nearest




Railway Station Arnej Railway Station, about 12.0 km towards

ESE direction

Highway NH8A (A‟bad-Rajkot), about 523.45 m towards S direction SH8 (Bagodara-Vataman), about 4.4 km towards

ENE direction

Air Port Sardar Vallabhbhai International Airport, Ahmedabad, about 67.0 km towards NE direction

Water body Bhogavo River (Seasonal), about 0.7 km towards S direction

Reserve Forests/National

Park/Wildlife Sanctuary


Nalsarovar Bird Sanctuary, about 12 km towards NNW direction



place



Note: Aerial distances are mentioned in above table

3.3 STUDY PERIOD

Baseline environmental quality represents the background scenario of

various environmental components. As part of EIA study, baseline

environmental monitoring was done over a radial distance of 10 km from

the project boundary during the period of January, 2018 to March,

2018.

3.4 SOURCE OF ENVIRONMENTAL DATA GENERATION

Baseline information on micrometeorology, ambient air quality, water

quality, noise level, soil quality and ecology (flora-fauna) are generated

by M/s. San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad. Apart from these,

secondary data have been collected from census book, revenue records,




soil survey and forest department, meteorological department etc. The

generation of primary as well as collection of secondary data &

information from the site and surrounding was carried out during the

period of January, 2018 to March, 2018.

3.5 METHODOLOGY

The process & methodology adopted for various environmental attributes

in the study is as follows:

To assess the Air environment in the study area, monitoring of the Air

quality was done by setting up reconnaissance. The samples were

collected by installation of combined samplers (with gaseous

attachment) at different locations for monitoring of primary air

pollutants to work out the existing status of air quality.

Ground water samples & surface water samples were analysed for the

parameters necessary to determine water quality (based on IS:

10500-2012 criteria) and those which are relevant from the point of

view of environmental status of the project site.

Soil samples were collected using an Auger and analysed for relevant

physico-chemical characteristics in order to assess the future impact

on soil of the project.

The noise level monitoring was done at various locations at different

intervals of time with the help of sound level meter at industrial,

commercial, residential & sensitive locations.

Socio-economic data was collected from field studies and secondary

sources like Census of India 2011, Revenue record, etc.

3.6 LAND ENVIRONMENT

Land cover is the physical material at the surface of the earth (includes

grass, trees, bare ground, water etc.); whereas Land use is the human

use of land. Studies on land use aspects of eco-system play an important

role in identifying susceptible issues and to take appropriate action to

uphold ecological equilibrium in the region. Main objective is to provide a

baseline status of the study area so that temporal changes due to the

proposed activities on the surroundings can be assessed in future.




3.6.1 Land use pattern of the Study Area

The study area of 10-km around the project site is considered in the land

use pattern study. The term land-use indicates the way in which the land

is utilized for different purposes. The land-use distribution of the study

area is given in Table 3.2. Land-use map is given in Figure 3.1.

3.6.2 Objective of Land Use Studies

The objectives of land use studies are (i) to develop land use & land cover

map using land coordinates of the project area, (ii) to identify and mark

important basic features according to primary and secondary data, and

(iii) to suggest measures for conservation and sustainable use of land.

Figure 3.1 Land use Map




Table 3.2 Land use statistics work out based on satellite imaginary

Level 1 Level 2 Area (Sq. km.) Area (%)

Agricultural -- 247.746 78.9

Built-up land

Settlements 9.106 2.9

Industrial area 5.966 1.9

Waste land Land with scrub 16.956 5.4

Land without scrub 25.748 8.2

Water body Tank/ River/Major Canal etc. 8.478 2.7

Total 314 100

3.6.3 Topography

The site area is plain with little undulating at few places. Agriculture and

allied activities are most predominant in this area. Fallow land and barren

lands were less observed near project site. There was no Eco Fragile Zone

or Natural Forest near project site in study area. Toposheet of location

with site location map of 10 km radius at 1:50,000 scale is shown in

Figure 3.12.

3.6.4 Seismicity of the area

The project site falls under seismic zone III. The Seismic Zone Map of

Gujarat is given below.

3.7 METEOROLOGY

Meteorology is the key to understand the air quality. Wind fluctuations

over a very wide range of time, accomplish dispersion and strongly

influence other processes associated with them. The micrometeorological

conditions at the project site will be regulating the transport and diffusion

of air pollutants released into the atmosphere.




3.7.1 Site specific micro-meteorological data

The data on surface meteorological parameters in the study area were

collected from January, 2018 to March, 2018, by setting up portable

weather monitoring station placed at project site. The sensor of the

equipment was kept at sufficient height (about 10 m) from ground level

with free exposure to the atmosphere. The monitoring methodology is

given in Table 3.3 & data collected are presented in Table 3.4.

The following parameters were recorded at hourly intervals during

monitoring period:

• Wind speed & Wind direction

• Temperature

• Relative humidity

• Rainfall

Table 3.3: Monitoring Methodology of Meteorological Data

Sr.

No.

Sampling

Parameters

Sample Collection Total

Sampling

Period

Sampling

Frequency

Methodology

Sampling

Equipment

Sensitivity/

Detection

Limit

1 Wind Speed Anemometer

cup counter

(0 to 65 m/s)

0.25 m/s January

2018 to

March

2018

Hourly As per

manufacturer‟s

manual,

Instruments

are

Calibrated

2 Wind

Direction

Wind vane

(0° to 359°)

10

3 Temperature Thermometer

(-40° to 60°)

0.10C

4 Humidity Hygrometer 3%

5 Rainfall Rain gauge 0.5 mm

6 Cloud Cover -- -- 4 Hourly Visual

Inspection by

the observer

Table 3.4: Meteorological Data for the Monitoring Period

(January, 2018 to March, 2018)

Month Wind

speed

(km/hr.)

Pre

dominant

wind

direction

Temp.

(0C)

Relative

Humidity

(%)

Rain fall (mm)

Max Min Max Min Max Min 24 hrs.

highest

No. of

rainy days

Jan,18 22 0 E & ENE 32 16 67 12 No rainfall during

the study period Feb,18 23 0 ENE & NNE 39 19 54 11

March,18 31 0 N & NE 42 24 60 06

3.7.2 Wind Rose

Wind rose is the diagrammatic representation of wind speed in a specified

direction with its arms representing sixteen directions, each arms give a




clear frequency distribution of wind speed in a particular direction for a

given period of time. It is one of the most important meteorological

parameters and governs dispersion, diffusion & transportation of

pollutants. The % frequencies of wind in 16 directions have been

computed from the recorded data during the study period for 24-hourly

intervals to plot wind rose. The predominant wind directions – ENE, NE, N

& NNE; implying that winds come from these directions for most of the

time during the period. The wind speed class 1-5 kmph occurred for

3.06%, 6-10 kmph about 28.5%, 11-15 kmph 40.8% and above 15

kmph and below 40 kmph occurred for 18.76% of the study period. Calm

wind during this period is 8.80%. Wind rose diagram is shown as Figure

3.8.

3.8 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY

3.8.1 Introduction

To quantify the impact of the proposed project on the ambient air quality,

it is necessary to evaluate the existing ambient air quality of the area.

The ambient air quality monitoring with respect to the study area of 10

km radius around the project site was done for the baseline information.

3.8.2 Design Network for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations

The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been assessed through

a scientifically designed ambient air quality monitoring network. The

design of monitoring network is based on the following considerations:

Topography/Terrain of the study area

Populated areas within the region

Prediction of maximum concentrations and distances of their likely

occurrence under prevailing meteorological conditions

Representation of regional background

Representatives of likely impact areas

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) stations were placed at eight

locations with due consideration to the above mentioned points.

3.8.3 Reconnaissance

Reconnaissance was undertaken to establish the baseline status of air

environment in the study region. The prime objective of the AAQ survey,




within 10 km radial study area around the proposed project, was to

establish the existing ambient air quality levels. The monitoring locations

(relative directions and distances) are given in Table 3.11 & shown in

Figure 3.7 and results are given in Table 3.12 to 3.17.

3.8.4 Parameters, Frequency and monitoring Methodology

The existing ambient air quality, in terms of Particulate Matter-10 (PM10),

Particulate Matter-2.5 (PM2.5), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen

(NOx), Carbon Monoxide (CO), Hydrocarbons (HC), Volatile Organic

Compounds (VOCs) has been measured. It was ensured that, the

equipment was placed at open space free from any obstacles at a height

of at least 3 to 4 m above the ground level at each monitoring station to

avoid the effects of wind-blown ground dust. Monitoring has been carried

out as per the latest CPCB and MoEF&CC guidelines and notifications.

Details of methodology are given in Table 3.5.

Table 3.5 Methodology of Ambient Air Monitoring

Sampling Parameters

Instrument used Analytical equipment

Detection Limit

Test method

PM10 Combined Sampler GTI-241

Electronic Balance 1 μg/m3 Gravimetric IS: 5182 (Part 23) 2006

PM2.5 Combined Sampler GTI-241

Electronic Balance 1 μg/m3 Gravimetric CPCB Guidelines for Ambient Air Monitoring

SO2 Gaseous flow attachment with combined sampler

Spectro Photometer 2.5 μg/m3

Colorimetric IS: 5182: (Part II) 2001

NOx Gaseous flow attachment with combined sampler

Spectro Photometer 6.0 μg/m3

Colorimetric IS: 5182: (Part VI) 2006

CO Bladder & Pump

Gas Chromatograph 1 ppm Gas Chromatography

HC Bladder & Pump Gas

Chromatograph

1 ppm Gas

Chromatography

VOC Bladder & Pump Gas

Chromatograph

1 ppm Gas

Chromatography

The duration of sampling of PM2.5, PM10, SO2 & NOx was 24-hourly

continuous sampling and CO, HC (Methane & non-Methane), VOCs

(Benzene, Toluene & Xylene) were sampled for 8-hours duration. The

monitoring was done for twice a week for three months. Parameters and

frequency of sampling is given in Table 3.6.




Table 3.6 Monitored Parameters and Frequency of Sampling

Parameters Sampling frequency

Particulate Matter (PM2.5) 24 hourly sample twice a week for three months

Particulate Matter (PM10) 24 hourly sample twice a week for three

months

Sulphur dioxide (SO2) 24 hourly sample twice a week for three

months

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) 24 hourly sample twice a week for three months

Carbon Monoxide (CO) 8 hourly sampling

Hydro Carbon (HC) 8 hourly sampling

Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) 8 hourly sampling

3.8.5 Interpretation of result

The existing baseline levels with respect to PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, CO,

HC, and VOCs are tabulated in Tables 3.13 to 3.17 & chart is given as

Figures 3.3 to 3.6.

Particulate Matter (PM10)

An average and 98th percentile value of 24-hourly PM10 values at all the

locations are found from 59.7 – 73.4 g/m3 and 63.4 – 77.1 g/m3. The

results were found well within the National Ambient Air Quality Standards

(NAAQS-CPCB) of 100 g/m3.

Particulate Matter (PM2.5)

An average and 98th percentile value of 24-hourly PM2.5 values at all the

locations ranges from 32.6 – 41.3 g/m3 and 37.0 – 45.2 g/m3. The

values are well within National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS-

CPCB) of 60 g/m3.

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)

An average and 98th percentile value of 24-hourly SO2 value of arithmetic

mean at all the locations ranged from 10.9 – 15.8 g/m3 and 12 – 17.8

g/m3 respectively, which are well below National Ambient Air Quality

Standards (NAAQS-CPCB) of 80 g/m3.

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)

An average and 98th percentile value of 24 hourly NOx value of arithmetic

mean at all the locations ranged from 13.6-19.6 g/m3 and 15.1 -24.2




g/m3 respectively, which are well below the National Ambient Air Quality

Standards (NAAQS-CPCB) of 80 g/m3.

3.9 Geology & Hydrogeology of study area

3.9.1 Geology

The area forms part of North Gujarat Alluvial Plain with elevations ranging

from 40 to 55 m above MSL. The area is under laid by post Miocene

alluvium comprising sand, gravel, silt and clay. The alluvium is about 400

m thick under laid by tertiary formation. The alluvium mainly consists of

palaeo deltaic, fluvial and Aeolian sediments, comprising alternate bands

of fine to course grained sand, gravel and yellowish brownish sticky clay.

The sub soil condition below the existing ground level is almost uniform in

nature. Sub soil is composed of Clay mixed with little fine grained silty

sand, moram and Kankar with low resistivity due to clay and soil

moisture. The area is covered with recent to sub recent alluvial deposits

comprising of brownish clay mixed with little fine grained sand, silty sand.

The Soil below ground level consists of top silty low plastic soil layer

having no swelling nature. Blackish brown to yellowish brown clayey silt

or sand silt layer extends to the depth of 5 to 7 mts.

3.9.2 Hydrogeology

The district forms a part of the Cambay Basin. The stratigraphic

succession of the formations encountered within the drilled depth of the

wells in the district along with its thickness and generalised lithology are

presented here. The litho logical logs of exploratory bore holes, electrical

logging results by govt. agencies in and around Bavla taluka have been

studied to understand the subsurface geology and the aquifer system.

These bore holes have penetrated the thick sequence of post Miocene

sediments down to +300 m depth. The hydro geological cross sections

have been prepared by CGWB to study the subsurface geology and

aquifer system in the area. It reveals the existence of multi-layered

aquifer system, within a depth of +300 m bgl.

Ground water in the fissured formations (Hard rocks)

The Deccan trap and the limestone formations occupying the western

part of the Dandhuka taluka form the only hard rock aquifers in the




district. It occupies the south western extremity of the district and can be

termed as fissured formation. Occurrence and movement of ground water

is governed by the extent and thickness of weathered zone, presence and

interconnections of joint and fracture systems, which provides secondary

porosity. The thickness of the weathered zone of the basalt ranges from

less than 1 meter to more than 6 m and the joints and fracture system is

prevalent down to a maximum depth of 80 to 90 mbgl in the basaltic

terrain. The occurrence of vesicles and amygdales in the flows of the trap

rocks and solution cavities in the limestone formations and the geological

contact between limestone and basalt are other factors favourable for

ground water storage and movement. Ground water occurs in the

weathered and fissured zones mainly under water table conditions. It

occasionally occurs under semi-confined conditions in the event of

comparatively deeper fracture system in these formations. These fissured

formations do not form good repository of groundwater, compared to

porous unconsolidated sedimentary formations. Groundwater is being

developed in these formations by means of dug and dug-cum-bored

wells. Depth of dug wells ranges between 5 and 38.5 mbgl whereas depth

of dug-cum-bored wells varies between 15 and 78 mbgl in the case of

fissured basaltic formations.

Ground water in Porous Formations (Sedimentary)

It occupies the major part (93.5%) of the district. It includes the post-

Miocene alluvial deposits at the top underlined by older Miocene

formations. The sedimentary formations mainly consist of fine to coarse-

grained sand, gravel, silt, clay, clay stone, siltstone and kankar. The

thickness of the post-Miocene alluvial formations exceeds 419 m near

Dholka at Rampur Ground water occurs under phreatic as well as

confined conditions in the granular horizons with in the sedimentary.

Unconfined aquifer

The unconfined aquifer occurs in the upper horizons down to a maximum

depth of 60-75 mbg consisting of medium to fine grained sand, silt with

local lenses of sandy clay and clay. Medium to fine grained sands are

found in the north-eastern part of the district. In this area where only




phreatic aquifer is present, base of the alluvium is marked by gravel. Fine

grained sands with silt are found further south and south-west at Dholka

and Sanand taluka. The thickness of aquifer varies between 20 and 45 m

in general, met within the depth range of 3 and 75 mbgl and can be

considered as unconfined aquifer. It is being developed by dug, dug-cum-

bored wells and tube wells. Depth of dug wells ranges between 5 and

38.5 mbgl whereas depth of dug-cum-bored wells varies between 15 and

78 mbgl in the case of fissured basaltic formations.

Confined aquifers

Deep bore well tapping confined aquifers are the main ground water

withdrawal structure. Due to rapid urban growth, heavy ground water

exploitation has resulted in progressive lowering of potential head and

discharges. Depths of bore well have increased from about 150 m in late

sixties to more than 300 m at present. Depth to water level in confined

aquifers ranged from 90 to 100 mts.

Water level Fluctuation

Large scale development of Ground Water from deep aquifers has

resulted in progressive decline in water levels. Presently the Pumping

water level rest more than 75m bgl and as a consequence discharge have

reduced or pumping costs have increased. The rate of decline varies from

2.06 m/yr to 2.136 m/yr.

3.10 WATER QUALITY

3.10.1 Introduction

Water quality assessment is one of the essential components of EIA

study. Such assessment helps in evaluating the existing health of water

body and suggesting appropriate mitigation measures to minimize the

potential impact from development projects. The water quality at the site

and other locations within the 10-km impact zone was monitored during

the study period. The purpose of the study is to:

Assess the water quality characteristics for critical parameters;

Evaluate the impact on agricultural productivity, habitat conditions

recreational resources and aesthetics in the vicinity; and




Predict the likely impacts on water quality due to the project and

related activities.

Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and monitoring locations were

finalized based on:

Location of residential areas representing different activities/likely

impact areas; and

Likely areas, which can represent baseline conditions.

3.10.2 Sampling Frequency, Techniques & Methodology

Six surface water and eight groundwater samples were collected during

the study period. Ground water samples were collected from the existing

bore wells, while surface water was collected from ponds by surface

water sampler. These samples were taken as grab samples. Necessary

precautions were taken for preservation of samples. Sampling locations

with source & date of sampling is given in Table 3.7.

The samples collection procedure was adopted from „Standard Methods‟

for the examination of Water and Wastewater published by American

Public Health Association (APHA) and IS 10500-2012. The samples were

analyzed for Physico-chemical parameters to assess the existing water

quality of the area (based on IS: 10500-2012 & APHA/AWWA, 23rd

edition). The water sampling locations marked within the study area and

the result of the analysis (ground water and surface water) is presented

in the Figure 3.9 & Table 3.19 & 3.20 respectively.

Table 3.7 Sampling locations with source & date of sampling

Ground Water Sampling Locations

Sample Code

Location Date of Sampling

Taluka District

GW1 Project site 15/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

GW2 Bagodara 15/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

GW3 Sarala 15/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

GW4 Rohika 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

GW5 Shiyal 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

GW6 Gundanapara 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

GW7 Mithapur 17/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

GW8 Jansali 17/02/2018 Limbdi Surendranagar




Surface Water Sampling Locations

Sample Code

Location Date of Sampling

Taluka District

SW1 Bagodara 15/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

SW2 Gundanapara 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

SW3 Rohika 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

SW4 Mithapur 17/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

SW5 Shiyal 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

SW6 Dhingda 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

3.10.3 Surface Water Quality (Primary data)

Surface water samples were collected from ponds of Bagodara,

Gundanapara, Rohika, Mithapur, Shiyal & Dhingda Village. Analysis of the

same is given in Table 3.20. The results have been compared with the

drinking water quality standards specified in IS: 10500-2012. It was

observed that, all the physico-chemical parameters and heavy metals

from surface water samples, except turbidity in all samples and TDS in

Rohika village are below stipulated drinking water standards and selected

source are suitable for domestic purposes.

3.10.4 Ground Water Quality

The results of the ground water quality monitored during the study period

are given in Table 3.19. Sampling location is shown in Figure 3.9.

3.10.5 Interpretation

The samples were taken as grab samples and analysed for various

parameters of ground water. Summary is given below:

Color: All the samples were found color less meeting desirable norms.

pH: All the samples meet the desirable standards (pH ranges from 7.5-

7.9).

Total Dissolved Solids (TDS): TDS in samples ranges from 1963 mg/L

(Bagodara) to 2948 mg/L (Jansali), all the samples exceed the

permissible limit of 2000 mg/L, except Bagodara village, which is almost

close to permissible limit.

Calcium: Calcium contents in the water ranges from 68 mg/L (Sarala) to

109 mg/L (Shiyal), all the samples meet the permissible limit of 200

mg/L (Permissible Limit in the Absence of Alternate Source).




Magnesium: Magnesium content in the water ranges from 37 mg/L

(Shiyal) to 52 mg/L (Project Site). All the samples meet the permissible

limit of 100 mg/L (Permissible Limit in the Absence of Alternate Source).

Sulfate: Sulfate content in the water ranges from 104 mg/L (Bagodara)

to 204 mg/L (Jansali). All the samples meet the permissible limit of 400


Fluoride: Fluoride content in the water ranges from 0.63 mg/L (Shiyal &

Jansali) to 0.72 mg/L (Project Site). All the samples meet the permissible

limit (1.5 mg/L).

Total Alkalinity: Total alkalinity in the water samples ranges from 349

mg/L (Sarala & Rohika) to 410 mg/L (Project site). All the samples are

within the permissible limit of drinking water (600 mg/L) (Permissible

Limit in the Absence of Alternate Source).

Other Parameters: Potassium (ranges from 42 mg/L to 103 mg/L),

Sodium (ranges from 622 mg/L to 1002 mg/L) and Chloride (ranges from

958 mg/L to 1486 mg/L). Chlorides in all the samples exceed the

permissible limit of 1000 mg/L, except Bagodara village.

Heavy metals like cadmium, copper, lead, chromium, iron and zinc are

well below the limit in all samples.

3.10.6 Conclusion

The results have been compared with the drinking water quality

standards specified in IS: 10500-2012. It is found that, all the samples

meet the permissible limit authority (BIS), except TDS & Chloride. TDS

and Chloride in all the samples, except Bagodara village exceed the

permissible limit of BIS. Indian Standard specification for drinking water

is given in Table 3.21.

3.11 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

Noise can be defined as an unwanted sound. The definition of noise as

unwanted sound implies that it has an adverse effect on human beings

and their environment. The noise level variation can be temporal, spatial.

It interferes with speech and hearing and is intense enough to damage

hearing or is otherwise annoying. Noise can also disturb natural wildlife




and ecological system. It is therefore, necessary to measure both the

quality as well as the quantity of noise in and around the proposed site.

3.11.1 Instrument used for Sampling and Monitoring

The intensity of sound energy in the environment is measured in a

logarithmic scale and is expressed in a decibel, dB(A) scale. Sound Level

Meter (SLM) is used for the collection of data related to noise at an

interval of one hour. The day noise levels have been monitored during

6:00 am to 10:00 pm and night noise levels during 10:00 pm to 6:00 am

at all the ten locations. Noise levels recorded at each station are

computed for equivalent noise levels. Noise monitoring methodology is

given in below Table 3.8.

Table 3.8 Monitoring Methodology of Noise

Environment

Component

Sampling

Location

Test method Instrument

used

Make

Ambient

Noise level

10

Locations

As per manufacturers

Manual

Sound Level

Meter

Mextech-

SL-4012

3.11.2 Noise Quality Monitoring Locations

The noise survey was conducted to assess the background noise levels in

different zones. Noise level measurements have been made at 10

locations within the study area using Sound Level Meter. Based on the

Gazettes Notification (S.O. 123(E)) of MoEF dated February 14, 2000 on

ambient air quality standards, 10 monitoring locations were selected. The

noise monitoring locations & its results are given in Figure 3.10 & Table

3.22 respectively.

3.11.3 Ambient Noise Standards

Ministry of Environment & Forests (MoEF) has notified the noise

standards vide Gazette Notification dated February 14, 2000 for different

zones viz. industrial, commercial, residential and silence zones under the

Environment Protection Act (1986). These standards are given in Table-

3.23.

3.11.4 Results

The noise levels of various locations are given in Table 3.22. The

monitored noise level in the day time Leq (Ld) varies from 50.0 to 56.6

dB(A) and the night time Leq (Ln) varies from 40.6 to 45.9 dB(A) within

the study area. Higher noise value of 56.6 dB(A) was recorded during day




time Nr. Bus stop Bagodara & lower noise value of 40.6 dB(A) was

recorded during night time at Primary School Shiyal.

3.11.5 Conclusion

Based on the observations made during the studies, it is concluded that;

the noise levels recorded at various locations in the study area show

considerable fluctuations because of changes in traffic movement,

commercial and other domestic activities in the study area. Overall the

ambient noise level in the monitored locations was found to be within the

permissible limits stipulated for residential, industrial areas, silence and

commercial zone.

3.12 SOIL ENVIRONMENT

Soils may be defined as a thin layer of earth‟s crust that serves as a

natural medium for the growth of plants. It is the unconsolidated mineral

matter that has been subjected to and influenced by genetic and

environmental factors. Soils serve as a reservoir of nutrients for plants

and crops and also provide mechanical anchorage and favourable tilth.

The objective of the soil sampling is:

To determine the baseline soil characteristics;

To monitor the impact on soil (pollutant deposition/other) in long

run.

The sub soil condition below the existing ground level is almost uniform in

nature. Sub soil is composed of Clay mixed with little fine grained silty

sand, moram and Kankar with low resistivity due to clay and soil

moisture.

3.12.1 Soil sampling locations

Soil quality of the study area is one of the important components for

environment impact assessment. The composite soil samples were

collected from the study area from eight locations (Project site, Bagodara,

Sarala, Rohika, Shiyal, Gunadnapara, Mithapur and Jansali) and were

analysed for different parameters. The location of the sampling is given

below in Table 3.9. Results are given in Table 3.24 and depicted in

Figure 3.11.




Table 3.9 Location of soil sampling

Sample

Code

Locations Date of

sampling

Tehsil District

S1 Project site 15/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

S2 Bagodra 15/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

S3 Sarala 15/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

S4 Rohika 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

S5 Shiyal 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

S6 Gundanapara 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

S7 Mithapur 17/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

S8 Jansali 17/02/2018 Limbdi Surendranagar

3.12.2 Methodology

To understand the soil quality of the study area, analysis of all eight

locations including the project site was conducted by making suspension

of soil sample. The samples were examined for various physical and

chemical characteristics in order to assess the quality of soil. Analysis was

done by using following methodology.

Table 3.10 Methodology of Soil Sample analysis

Sampling

Parameters

Sample

collection

Analytical

Equipment

Methodology Remarks

Porosity

Manual

sample

Collection in

polyethylene

bags using

an Auger

- IS: 2720 Part 7 Trial pit

method

for topsoil

sample

collection;

disturbed

samples

Water holding

capacity

- -

Permeability - IS: 2720 Part 17

Moisture

content

Electronic

Balance

IS: 2720 Part 2

Texture - IS: 2720 Part 4

Particle size

Distribution

Glass wares

IS: 2720 Part 4 5%

Leachate to

be made

and

analyzed as

per

APHA,

“Standard

Methods”

All method

numbers

are as

per APHA

“Standard

Methods”

(23rd

edition)

Cation

Exchange

Capacity

Centrifuge IS: 2720 Part 24

(1976)

SAR F. Photometer

(Na, K)

Titration

(Ca & Mg)

Calculation

pH pH Meter 4500 H+B

Electrical

Conductivity

Conductivity

Meter

As per IS 14767

-2000

Calcium Glass wares 3500 Ca B

Magnesium Glass wares 3500 Mg B

Sodium (Na) Flame

Photometer

3500 Na B

Potassium

Flame

Photometer

3500 K B




3.12.3 Corollaries

Physical Parameters

Particle Size: A Particle size of the different constituents (clay, silt, sand

and gravel) controls the porosity and water holding characteristic of the

soil. Clay (size<0.002 mm) amount in the soil samples ranges from 10 %

to 16%; Silt (size 0.002 to 0.075 mm) in the soil samples is 16% to 23%

and Sand (size 0.075 to 0.475 mm) in the soil samples is 35% to 44%,

while Gravel (size>4.75 mm) in the soil samples is 22% to 33%. Analysis

shows that the soil has moderate water holding capacity.

Porosity: Porosity is a measure of space in between soil particles caused

by structural conditions and determined under identical conditions.

Porosity of soil samples of the study area ranges from 41.7% to 44.1%.

Water Holding Capacity (WHC): Water Holding Capacity (WHC) of soil

samples of the study area ranges from 39% to 47%.

Bulk Density: Bulk Density of soils in the study area is found to be in the

range from 1.38 to 1.44 g/cm3.

Chemical Parameters

pH: pH of soils in the study area is found to be in the range of 7.6 to 8.0.

Chloride: Chloride content in soils of the study area is found to be in the

range of 1012 to 1866 mg/kg.

Soluble Calcium: The soluble calcium as CaCO3 in soil samples is found

to be in the range of 590 to 891 mg/kg.

Magnesium: Magnesium content in soil samples of the study area ranges

from 369 to 486 mg/kg.

Total Phosphorus: Available Phosphorus content in soil samples of the

study area ranges from 21 to 112 mg/kg.

Total Nitrogen: Available nitrogen content in soil samples of the study

area is found to be in the range from 98 to 117 mg/kg.

Potassium: Potassium content in soil samples of the study area is found

to be in the range from 97 to 189 mg/kg.

Sodium: Sodium content in soil samples of the study area is found to be

in the range from 2018 to 2846 mg/kg.




Total Organic Matter (TOM): Total organic matter content in soil

samples of the study area is found to be in the range of 3.8 to 5.3 mg/kg.

3.12.4 Conclusion

In the study area, variations in the pH value ranging from 7.6 to 8.0

which shows that the soil is slightly alkaline in nature. Organic Matter

ranges from 3.8 to 5.3 mg/kg in the soil samples. Soil of the study area

is known to be good for cultivation. Generally, soils with low bulk density

have favourable physical conditions (porosity and permeability) whereas

those with high bulk density exhibit poor physical conditions for

agriculture crops.

3.13 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

An ecological study of the ecosystem is essential to understand the

impact of industrialization and urbanization on existing flora and fauna of

the study area. The biological study was undertaken as a part of the EIA

study report to:

Understand the present status of ecosystem prevailing in the study

area.

Compare it with past condition with the help of available data.

Predict changes in the biological environment as a result of present

activities and to suggest measures for maintaining its health.

The survey was conducted to study the flora & fauna in 10 km radius.

Some of the information was gathered from the local habitants. All the

collected data were classified to interpret the impact of pollution on the

flora and fauna of the region.

3.13.1 Period of the study

The baseline study, for the assessment of the floral and faunal

biodiversity of the terrestrial environment, within 10 km radius from the

site was conducted during January, 2018 to March, 2018.

3.13.2 Study methodology

Survey methodology was based on the flora and fauna species

identification in person, recently recorded and found in the region by the

localities. Sampling of grass species was carried out by quadrat sampling




method to examine the species distribution and its frequency in the

region.

Quadrate Sampling Method:

A quadrat (or plot-based) survey is a quantitative examination of species

distribution & abundance. Quadrats are more likely to detect

inconspicuous species because a smaller area is sampled in a

concentrated search. The survey was carried out for the vegetation

ground cover found in the road edges by 1 m2 quadrat and study on the

edge effect due to rapid industrialization and urbanization.

3.13.3 Floral species in the study area

Flora is basically the plant life that is present in a particular region or

habitat at a particular time. List of flora found in the study area is

tabulated in Table 3.25.

3.13.4 Fauna in the study area

Fauna is the animal life that is present in a particular region or habitat at

a particular time. Irrespective of its unfriendly terrain, Gujarat gives

shelter to a variety of animals and birds. They live in smaller herds and

thrive mainly on wild grasses and various types of shrubs.

Faunal biodiversity with their scientific names and common names is

presented in Table 3.26.

3.14 TRAFFIC SURVEY

Reconnaissance

The traffic survey, to ascertain the traffic density in the study area was

conducted on the road near the project site. The objective of traffic study

and emission quantification is to assess the magnitude of the emissions

resulting from two-wheelers, three wheelers, and four wheelers that are

extensively used as a means of common transport within the urban

areas.

Traffic survey of the Study Area

The traffic survey, to ascertain the traffic density in the study area was

conducted on the road near to the project site and also to evaluate the

impacts of the increased traffic due to the proposed activity. The

methodology adopted for carrying out the traffic study was to select the




major roads around the project site and count the various categories of

vehicles moving on these roads given in Table 3.27.

Level of Service

Sr. No. Existing Volume/ Capacity Ratio

Level of Services

1 0.0 to 0.2 “A” (Excellent)

2 0.2 to 0.4 “B” (Very Good)

3 0.4 to 0.6 “C” (Good)

4 0.6 to 0.8 “D” (Fair)

5 0.8 to 1.0 “E” (Poor)

Baseline/ Existing Traffic Scenario & Level of Services

The road from Bagodara-Rajkot-Bagodara is four lane road with divider

(two ways) and all types of vehicles move on the road.

Capacity of road as per IRC = 3600 PCU‟s/hr.

Total Volume during Peak Hours = 2113 PCU‟s/hr (Table 3.27)

Existing Volume/Capacity ratio = 2113/3600= 0.587

The level of service is “C” that is good but near to Fair

3.15 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

An essential part of environmental study is socio-economic environment

incorporating various facts related to socio-economic conditions in the

area, which deals with the total environment. Socio economic study

includes demographic structure of the area, provision of basic amenities

viz., housing, education, health and medical services, occupation, water

supply, sanitation, communication, transportation as well as feature of

aesthetic significance such as temples, historical monuments etc. at the

baseline level. This would help in visualizing and predicting the possible

impact depending upon the nature and magnitude of the project. Socio-

economic study of an area provides a good opportunity to assess the

socioeconomic conditions of an area.

3.15.1 Objective of the study

The objectives of this socio-economic report consist of:

To conduct socio-economic assessment study in lease Area

To help in providing better living standards.




To know the current socio-economic situation in the region to cover

the sub sectors of education, health, sanitation, water and food

security.

To provide employment opportunities.

3.15.2 Land use pattern and infrastructure

The land use pattern indicates the manner in which different parts of land

in an area is being utilized or non-utilized. It is an important indicator of

environmental health; human activity and a degree of inter play between

these two. Even though the soil quality, water availability and climate

have strong influence on agriculture and vegetation, the human activity

may alter the natural environment to a large extent to suit human needs.

Unnatural land use often triggers rapid environmental deterioration and

disturbs ecological balance. In census records, major land use

classifications are; Forests, Culturable land, Culturable wasteland and

area not available for cultivation. Culturable land is further classified as:

irrigated and un-irrigated. Area not available for cultivation includes lands

put to non-agriculture uses as well as barren and uncultivable lands.

The main land use in area is for dwellings, infrastructure and related

activities. However, the land use pattern for rural areas is discussed

below. The information is preliminary based on 2011 Census as depicting

in Table 3.28. Total land area is 34007.6 ha, out of that Irrigated area is

9428.1 ha. It constitutes 27.72% of the total land area. 11713.4 ha are

un-irrigated by source and it constitutes 34.44% of total land area. The

study area consist of Cultivable wasteland is 1490.2 ha (4.38%). Area not

available for cultivation is 3554.8 ha & it constitute 10.45%.

3.15.3 Demographic and Socio-Economic Environment

The demographic and Socio-economic details of the study area are

discussed below. These are primarily based on census data of 2011. Data

on number of households, population as well as literacy and employment

pattern in the study area have been presented in Table 3.29. The

employment pattern in the area is indicator of number of persons

employed in various sectors. It also indicates the various categories of




employment flourishing in the area. The Study area in 10 km radius has

42 villages including project site.

The total no. of household in the villages are 6152 and the total

population is 30879 (51.96% men & 48.04% women). 56.69% of are

literate while literacy rate among men & women is 66.65% & 45.92%

respectively. 49.08% of male population is part of main worker, while

only 10.64% of female population is a part of main workers. 5.55% of

male workers are marginal workers, while 19.52% of female workers are

engaged in such type of activities. 45.37% of male population and

69.84% of female population are non-workers.

3.15.4 Living Standard and Infrastructure

In India it is not possible to setup a primary standard of living because of

wide variations in terms of income, economic conditions, social custom,

employment opportunity, pattern of spending, etc. However, availability

of amenities like education, medical, water supply, communication, road

network, electricity, etc. significantly reflects the level of development of

the area. Information on available amenities in the study area has been

extracted from census record of 2011. Total numbers of village in study

area are 13. On the basis of data presented in the Table 3.30, the status

of available amenities is discussed in following sub-sections:

Educational Facilities

As per 2011 census, there are 14 primary schools, 4 Secondary schools,

2 senior secondary school in all 13 villages.

Medical Facilities

13 villages in the study area have 1 Primary Health Centre, 4 Primary

Health Sub Centre, 1 Veterinary hospital, 1 Family Welfare Centre in

study area of 10 km.

Drinking Water Supply

All the villages in the study area have mainly tap water supply as a

source of drinking water. In addition to this, some of the villages have

facility of Tube well water supply, Hand Pump water facility, Well water

facility, tank water facility, 3 villages have River/canal.




Communication and Transport

The main mode of public transport available in the study area is by bus

service. One village have approach to railway station as western railway

line is passing through nearby. 11 villages out of 13 villages in the study

area are connected with Pucca road. 4 villages have water bound

macadam facilities, 6 villages are connected with the State highways and

4 villages are connected with the national highways. All the villages have

footpath facility.

Post and Telegraph

As per 2011 census record out of 13 villages in study area, 9 villages

have Sub post office facility at doorstep & phone facility.

Power Supply

As per 2011 census record almost all the villages are getting power

supply for all purposes.




Table 3.11: Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations

(Monitoring Period: January, 2018 to March, 2018)

Sr.

No.

Sampling

Location

Direction

w.r.t project site

Distance

in km

Type of

Area

1 Project site (A1) -- 0.0 Industrial

2 Bagodra (A2) ENE (UW) 3.29 Residential

3 Sarala (A3) NE (UW) 5.57 Residential

4 Rohika (A4) ENE (UW) 7.84 Residential

5 Shiyal (A5) N (UW) 6.22 Residential

6 Gundanapara (A6) SE (DW) 3.52 Residential

7 Mithapur (A7) WSW (DW) 4.08 Residential

8 Jansali (A8) SW (DW) 6.20 Residential




Table 3.12: Ambient Air Quality Status


Sr.

No.

Sampling Station PM10

(g/m3)

PM2.5

(g/m3)

SO2

(g/m3)

NOx

(g/m3)

Average (Min-Max)

1 Project site (A1) 64.9

(56.6-76.0)

34.0

(30.1-41.5)

13.6

(10.3-17.9)

19.6

(17.3-24.4)

2 Bagodra (A2) 67.6

(62.4-70.8)

32.6

(29.0-37.4)

14.4

(11.3-16.5)

16.2

(13.8-17.8)

3 Sarala (A3) 66.4

(61.7-71.9)

33.9

(29.0-37.3)

11.9

(9.6-13.8)

14.4

(12.1-16.5)

4 Rohika (A4) 73.4

(68.9-77.2)

41.3

(35.8-45.5)

15.8

(13.7-18.2)

16.6

(14.2-20.9)

5 Shiyal (A5) 65.4

(61.0-68.9)

33.5

(27.5-42.4)

12.7

(9.6-14.7)

17.4

(13.2-19.4)

6 Gundanapara (A6) 66.5

(50.6-76.7)

33.8

(26.0-43.6)

13.3

(10.1-17.1)

16.1

(13.4-21.6)

7 Mithapur (A7) 65.4

(61.0-68.9)

33.5

(27.5-42.4)

12.8

(11.1-14.7)

15.5

(13.9-17.1)

8 Jansali (A8) 59.7

(56-63.5)

35.9

(29.9-40.3)

10.9

(9.6-12.3)

13.6

(12.2-15.3)

Figure 3.2 Graphical representation of Ambient Air Quality




Table 3.13: Ambient Air Quality Status (PM10)


Average-24 Hours Unit-g/m3

Station Name Max Min 98th

Percentile

75th

Percentile

50th

Percentile

25th

percentile

Avg. SD

Project site (A1) 76.0 56.6 75.4 71.7 62.7 60.8 64.9 6.2

Bagodra (A2) 70.8 62.4 70.8 69.2 67.8 66.7 67.6 2.3

Sarala (A3) 71.9 61.7 71.5 68.8 66.2 63.7 66.4 3.1

Rohika (A4) 77.2 68.9 77.1 75.0 73.7 71.5 73.4 2.3

Shiyal (A5) 68.9 61.0 68.8 67.1 65.1 64.4 65.4 2.2

Gundanapara (A6) 76.7 50.6 76.6 72.0 65.9 64.0 66.5 6.5

Mithapur (A7) 68.9 61.0 68.8 67.1 65.1 64.4 65.4 2.2

Jansali (A8) 63.5 56.0 63.4 61.3 59.3 58.1 59.7 2.2

Figure 3.3 Graphical representation for PM10




Table 3.14: Ambient Air Quality Status (PM2.5)




Percentile

75th

Percentile

50th

Percentile

25th

percentile

Avg. SD

Project site (A1) 41.5 30.1 40.7 35.6 33.3 32.3 34.0 3.0

Bagodra (A2) 37.4 29.0 37.0 34.5 32.4 30.6 32.6 2.5

Sarala (A3) 37.3 29.0 37.2 35.6 34.0 32.5 33.9 2.3

Rohika (A4) 45.5 35.8 45.2 43.6 41.6 39.0 41.3 2.8

Shiyal (A5) 42.4 27.5 41.3 35.8 33.1 31.3 33.5 3.5

Gundanapara (A6) 43.6 26.0 41.8 34.2 33.5 32.8 33.8 3.5

Mithapur(A7) 42.4 27.5 41.3 35.8 33.1 31.3 33.5 3.5

Jansali (A8) 40.3 29.9 40.3 38.9 35.7 34.3 35.9 3.0

Figure 3.4 Graphical representation for PM2.5




Table 3.15: Ambient Air Quality Status (SO2)




Percentile

75th

Percentile

50th

Percentile

25th

percentile

Avg. SD

Project site(A1) 17.9 10.3 17.8 14.3 13.2 12.1 13.6 2.0

Bagodra(A2) 16.5 11.3 16.4 15.9 14.5 13.2 14.4 1.6

Sarala (A3) 13.8 9.6 13.8 12.6 11.9 11.2 11.9 1.2

Rohika (A4) 18.2 13.7 17.8 16.6 16.0 15.0 15.8 1.1

Shiyal (A5) 14.7 9.6 14.5 13.4 12.8 12.2 12.7 1.2

Gundanapara(A6) 17.1 10.1 16.9 14.6 12.8 12.0 13.3 2.0

Mithapur(A7) 14.7 11.1 14.5 13.4 12.8 12.3 12.8 1.0

Jansali (A8) 12.3 9.6 12.0 11.4 11.0 10.5 10.9 0.6

Figure 3.5 Graphical representation for SO2




Table 3.16: Ambient Air Quality Status (NOx)




Percentile

75th

Percentile

50th

Percentile

25th

percentile

Avg. SD

Project site(A1) 24.4 17.3 24.2 20.7 18.8 17.7 19.6 2.2

Bagodra(A2) 17.8 13.8 17.7 17.1 16.3 15.8 16.2 1.2

Sarala (A3) 16.5 12.1 16.4 15.4 14.4 13.7 14.4 1.2

Rohika (A4) 20.9 14.2 19.4 17.0 16.4 16.0 16.6 1.2

Shiyal (A5) 19.4 13.2 19.3 18.4 17.4 16.9 17.4 1.4

Gundanapara(A6) 21.6 13.4 21.3 16.5 14.8 14.6 16.1 2.6

Mithapur(A7) 17.1 13.9 17.1 16.2 15.4 14.9 15.5 1.0

Jansali (A8) 15.3 12.2 15.1 14.2 13.5 13.0 13.6 0.8

Figure 3.6 Graphical representation for NOx




Table 3.17: Ambient Air Quality Status

(CO, HC (Methane & non-Methane), VOC)


Unit-g/m3

Station Name CO

(g/m3)

Hydro Carbon

(g/m3)

VOC (g/m3)

Methane Non-

Methane

Benzene Toluene Xylene Total

Project site (A1) 1192 35.2 1094 0.24 BDL BDL 0.24

Bagodra (A2) 1210 43.2 1233 0.35 BDL 0.19 0.54

Sarala (A3) 1084 32.5 1173 BDL BDL BDL BDL

Rohika (A4) 1045 32.0 1084 0.19 BDL BDL 0.19

Shiyal (A5) 1104 30.1 1109 0.21 BDL BDL 0.21

Gundanapara (A6) 1054 26.6 1187 BDL BDL BDL BDL

Mithapur (A7) 1304 40.0 1181 0.32 0.16 BDL 0.48

Jansali (A8) 1028 35.1 1129 BDL BDL BDL BDL

*BDL – Below Detectable limit




Table 3.18: National Ambient Air Quality Standards

(EP, 7th amendment rules-2009)

Pollutants Time-weighted average

Concentration in ambient air

Industrial, Residential, Rural and

others area

Ecologically Sensitive area (Notified by

Central Government)

Method of Measurement

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), µg/m3

Annual Average*

50 20 Improved west and Gaeke method

Ultraviolet fluorescence

24 hours** 80 80

Oxides of Nitrogen as (NO2), µg/m3

Annual Average*

40 30 Modified Jacob &Hochheiser

(Na-Arsenate)

Chemiluminescence 24 hours** 80 80

Particulate Matter (Size less than 10

µm or PM10, µg/m3

Annual Average*

60 60 Gravimetric TOEM

Beta attenuation 24 hours** 100 100

Particulate Matter (Size less than 2.5 µm or PM2.5, µg/m3

Annual Average*

40 40 Gravimetric TOEM Beta attenuation 24 hours** 60 60

Ozone (O3) µg/m3

8 hours ** 100 100 UV photometric Chemiluminescence Chemical Method

1hours** 180 180

Lead (Pb) µg/m3

Annual Average*

0.50 0.50 AAS/ICP method after sampling on EPM 2000 or equivalent

filter paper

ED-XRF using Teflon filter

24 hours** 1.0 1.0

Carbon Monoxide

(CO) mg/m3

8 hours** 02 02 Non Dispersive Infra

Red (NDIR) spectroscopy

1 hour** 04 04

Ammonia (NH3)

µg/m3

Annual

Average*

100 100 Chemiluminescence

Indophenol Blue Method 24 hours** 400 400

Benzene (C6H6) µg/m3

Annual* 05 05 Gas chromatography based continuous analyzer

Adsorption and desorption followed

by GC analysis

Benzo(a) Pyrine

(BaP)-particulate

phase only, ng/m3

Annual* 01 01 Solvent extraction

followed by HPLC/GC

analysis

Arsenic (As), ng/m3

Annual* 06 06 AAS/ICP method after sampling on EPM

2000 or equivalent filter paper

Nickel (Ni) ng/m3

Annual* 20 20 AAS/ICP method after sampling on EPM

2000 or equivalent filter paper

* Annual Arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year taken twice a

week 24 hourly at uniform interval.

** 24 hourly/8 hourly or 01 hourly values, as applicable, shall be complied with 98% of the time in a year. 2% of the time, they may exceed the limits but not

two consecutive days of monitoring.




Table 3.19: Results of Groundwater Quality in the Study Area

(Date of Sampling: 15/02/2018 to 17/02/2018) Parameters Unit CONCENTRATION

Project site

(GW1)

Bagodara

(GW2)

Sarala

(GW3)

Rohika

(GW4)

Shiyal

(GW5)

Gundanapara

(GW6)

Mithapur

(GW7)

Jansali

(GW8)

pH pH Unit 7.8 7.7 7.6 7.7 7.5 7.8 7.8 7.9

Color Co-Pt

Unit

Color

less

Color

less

Color

less

Color

less

Color

less

Color

less

Color

less

Color

less

Conductivity Micro

mhos/cm 3820 2770 3410 3325 4140 3445 3710 4155

Turbidity NTU 6.8 5.6 4.3 6.9 5.8 5.6 5.7 5.5

TDS mg/L 2710 1963 2409 2360 2935 2442 2630 2948

Total Hardness as

CaCO3

mg/L 426 419 380 362 425 371 380 447

Total Alkalinity mg/L 410 365 349 349 374 352 390 405

Sodium as Na+ mg/L 832 622 847 810 1001 878 912 1002

Potassium as K+ mg/L 103 71 55 65 58 42 53 55

Calcium as Ca+2 mg/L 85 87 68 69 109 76 88 103

Magnesium as Mg+2 mg/L 52 49 51 46 37 44 39 46

Chlorides as Cl- mg/L 1310 958 1155 1049 1435 1228 1258 1486

Sulfates as SO4-2 mg/L 112 104 170 178 203 129 193 204

Fluoride as F- mg/L 0.72 0.66 0.69 0.68 0.63 0.70 0.71 0.63

Nitrates as NO3-3 mg/L 20 21 17 19 21 17 18 16

Phenol mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

Cyanide as CN- mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

Arsenic as As mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Cadmium as Cd mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Copper as Cu mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Lead as Pb mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Manganese as Mn mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Iron as Fe mg/L 0.34 0.22 0.20 0.28 0.19 0.22 0.22 0.25

Total Chromium mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Zinc as Zn mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

% Sodium -- 76.3 72.5 80.2 79.7 81.2 81.7 81.4 80.7




Table 3.20: Surface Water analysis of study area

(Date of Sampling: 15/02/2018 to 17/02/2018)

Parameters Unit CONCENTRATION

Bagodara

Pond

(SW1)

Gunda

Na Para

Pond

(SW2)

Rohika

Pond

(SW3)

Mithapur

Pond

(SW4)

Shiyal

Pond

(SW5)

Dhingda

Pond

(SW6)

pH pH Unit 7.46 7.51 8.02 7.82 7.48 7.51

Conductivity Micro

mhos/cm

590 635 3620 590 650 855

Turbidity NTU 12.3 10.9 10.5 14.3 16.2 14.1

TDS mg/L 410 442 2514 415 452 592

Dissolved Oxygen mg/L 6.6 6.6 5.1 5.8 5.9 4.9

Total Hardness as

CaCO3

mg/L 133 144 481 137 208 233

Total Alkalinity mg/L 226 242 385 235 224 269

Sodium as Na+ mg/L 123 135 835 116 102 169

Potassium K+ mg/L 23 28 40 28 20 28

Calcium Ca+2 mg/L 22 18 46 17 34 34

Magnesium Mg+2 mg/L 19 24 89 23 30 36

Chlorides as Cl- mg/L 113 136 1310 135 179 224

Sulfates as SO4-2 mg/L 56 67 132 63 51 52

Nitrates as NO3-3 mg/L 8.1 7.2 8.8 7.0 5.7 6.4

Phenol as CH3OH mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

Cyanide as CN- mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

Arsenic as As mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Cadmium as Cd mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Copper as Cu mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Lead as Pb mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Manganese as Mn mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Iron as Fe mg/L 0.19 0.18 0.13 0.15 0.17 0.26

Total Chromium mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Zinc as Zn mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Total Coliform MPN/ml 30 30 620 52 46 42




Table 3.21: Indian Standard Specification for Drinking Water

Sr. No.

Parameters Desirable Limit

Permissible Limit in the

Absence of Alternate

Source

I Essential Characteristics

1. Colour, Hazen Units, Max. 5 25

2. Odour Unobjectionable -

3. Taste Agreeable -

4. Turbidity, NTU, Max. 5 10

5. pH 6.5-8.5 No Relaxation

6. Total Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l, Max. 300 600

7. Iron (as Fe) mg/l, Max. 0.3 1.0

8. Chlorides (as Cl) mg/l, Max. 250 1000

9. Residual Free Chlorine, mg/l, Min. 0.20* -

II Desirable Characteristics

10. Dissolved Solids, mg/l, Max. 500 2000

11. Alkalinity (as CaCO3), mg/l, Max. 200 600

12. Sulphate (as SO4) mg/l, Max. 200 400

13. Nitrate (as NO3) 45 100

14. Fluoride (as F) mg/l, Max. 1.0 1.5

15. Calcium (as Ca) mg/l, Max. 75 200

16. Magnesium (as Mg) mg/l, Max. 30 100

17. Copper (as Cu) mg/l, Max. 0.05 1.5

18. Manganese (as Mn) mg/l, Max. 0.1 0.3

19. Mercury (as Hg) mg/l, Max. 0.001 No Relaxation

20. Cadmium (as Cd) mg/l, Max. 0.01 No Relaxation

21. Selenium (as Se) mg/l, Max. 0.01 No Relaxation

22. Arsenic (As As) mg/l, Max. 0.05 No Relaxation

23. Cyanide (as CN) mg/l, Max. 0.05 No Relaxation

24. Lead (as Pb) mg/l, Max. 0.05 No Relaxation

25. Zinc (as Zn) mg/l, Max. 5 15

26. Aluminium (as Al) mg/l, Max. 0.03 0.2

27. Boron (as B) mg/l, Max. 1 5

28. Chromium (as Cr) mg/l, Max. 0.05 No Relaxation

29. Phenolic Compounds (as C6H5OH) mg/l, Max.

0.001 0.002

30. Anionic Detergents (as MBAS) mg/l, Max. mg/l, Max.

0.2 1.0

31. Mineral Oil mg/l, Max. 0.01 0.03

32. Pesticides Absent 0.001

33. Radioactive Materials a. Alpha Emitters, Bq/I, Max.

b. Beta Emitters, Pci/I, Max

-

-

0.1

0.037

Note: * Applicable only when water is chlorinated

Source: IS: 10500, 2012




Table 3.22: Ambient Noise Levels in the Study Area

(Date of Monitoring: 15/02/2018 to 17/02/2018)

Sr.

No.

Locations Ld/Ln Noise Level

dB(A)

1 Project site (N1) Ld 54.9

Ln 44.2

2 100 m West from the site (N2) Ld 53.1

Ln 43.4

3 250 m South from the site (N3) Ld 52.8

Ln 42.5

4 500 m North from the site (N4) Ld 54.0

Ln 42.9

5 1000 m East from the site (N5) Ld 56.3

Ln 41.9

6 Nr. Bus stop Bagodara(N6) Ld 56.6

Ln 42.3

7 Village Rohika (N7) Ld 52.1

Ln 41.5

8 Primary School Shiyal(N8) Ld 50.0

Ln 40.6

9 Village Gundanapara (N9) Ld 52.9

Ln 41.2

10 Village Mithapur(N10) Ld 56.5

Ln 45.9

Table 3.23

Ambient Air Quality Standards with respect to Noise

Zone Limits Leq, dB(A)

Day Time Night Time

Industrial 75 70

Commercial 65 55

Residential 55 45

Silence 50 40




Table 3.24: Soil Analysis of Study area

(Date of Sampling: 15/02/2018 to 17/02/2018)

Parameters Unit Concentration

Project site

(S1)

Bagodra

(S2)

Sarala

(S3)

Rohika

(S4)

Shiyal

(S5)

Gundanapara

(S6)

Mithapur

(S7)

Jansali

(S8)

pH (5%) Solution 7.8 7.6 7.7 8.0 7.7 8.0 7.9 7.6

Loss of Ignition % 8.9 9.2 6.8 7.6 9.2 9.8 9.2 7.3

Particle Size

Clay (< 0.002 mm) % 12 15 12 10 14 16 13 14

Silt (0.002 - 0.075mm) % 23 21 19 21 18 20 16 20

Sand (0.075-0.475 mm % 44 39 36 41 35 35 39 41

gravel (size > 4.75 mm) % 22 25 33 28 33 29 31 25

Water Holding Capacity % 39 43 47 44 41 43 42 40

Permeability cm/hr 2.93 3.41 3.29 3.13 3.20 3.22 3.43 3.28

Bulk Density g/cm3 1.38 1.43 1.44 1.42 1.44 1.41 1.43 1.40

Porosity % 44.1 42.1 41.7 42.5 41.7 42.9 42.1 43.3

Sodium Absorption Ratio - 16.37 18.67 13.71 15.29 19.74 15.50 17.16 16.43

Sodium mg/kg 2344 2437 2018 2279 2846 2130 2399 2158

Potassium mg/kg 104 116 189 104 163 118 97 152

Calcium mg/kg 891 590 828 891 828 729 779 689

Magnesium mg/kg 396 419 486 473 446 419 419 369

Chlorides mg/kg 1866 1643 1012 1283 1012 1632 1352 1320

Sulphates mg/kg 604 528 540 464 540 500 396 488

Organic Matter mg/kg 5.3 4.5 3.8 4.0 3.8 3.8 4.8 5.0

Available Nitrogen mg/kg 117 110 103 102 102 101 98 106

Available Phosphorus mg/kg 86 78 21 112 59 79 110 101

Iron mg/kg 2.05 1.79 1.90 1.86 1.90 1.73 1.91 1.88

Manganese mg/kg 4.45 3.32 4.45 4.87 2.26 3.52 3.52 3.32

Cation exchange

capacity (CEC)

- 18.21 17.33 17.45 18.57 20.65 16.70 18.07 16.29




Table 3.25

Floral Diversity

(A) Trees

Sr.

No.

Scientific Name Family Vernacular Name

1 Acacia auriculiformis Mimosaceae Australian Baval

2 Acacia caiehu Mimosaceae Khair

3 Acacia niloticaSubsp.Indica Mimosaceae Baval

4 Albizziaindica Mimosaceae Siris

5 Azadirachta indica Meliaceae Limdo

6 Eucalytus globules Myrtaceae Nilgiri

7 Ficusvirens Moraceae Pipli

8 Leucenaleucocephala Mimosaceae PardesiBaval

9 Parkinsonia aculeate Caesalpiniaceae Ram Baval

10 Peltophorumpterocarpum Caesalpiniaceae Tamarafali

11 Pongamia pinnata fabaceae Karanj

12 Prosopisjuliflora Mimosaceae GandoBaval

13 Prosopisspicigera Mimosaceae Khijado

14 Roystonearegia Arecaceae Royal Palm

15 Salvadoraaleoides Salvadoraceae Pilvo

16 Salvadorapersica Salvadoraceae Pilvo

17 Samaneasaman Mimosaceae Rate Saeasdo

(B) Shrubs

Sr.

No.


1 Cadabaindica Capparidaceae Teliohemkand

2 Calotropis gigantean Asclepiadaceae Akado

3 Calotropisprocera Asclepiadaceae Akado

4 Capparissepiaria Capparidaceae Kerdo

5 Capparissepiaria Capparidaceae Kanthar

6 Euphorbia nerifolia Euphorbiaceae Thor

7 Ipomoea fistulosa Convolvulaceae Nafatio

8 Nerium indicum Apocynaceae LalKarne

9 Zizyphusrotundifolia Rhamnaceae ChaniBor




(C) Herbs

Sr.

No.


1 Abutilon indicum Malvaceae Khapat

2 Amaranthusviridis Amarathaceae -

3 Cassis pumpila Caesalpiniaceae Nani Chimed

4 Cenchrussetigerus Poaceae DhamanGhas

5 Chenopodium album Chenopodiaceae Chil

6 Chlorisbarbata Poaceae Mindadin

7 Clitoriatematea Fabaceae Gokern

8 Cynodoncretica Convolvulaceae Rudanti

9 Cynodondoctylon Poaceae Darbh

10 Cyperuscompressus Cyperraceae -

11 Daemiaextensa Asclepiadaceae ChamarDudheli

12 Echinopusechinatus Asteraceae Shulio

13 HeliotropiumSupinum Borginaceae GhedioOKharad

14 Heteropogencontortus Poaceae Dabhsuliu

15 Ipomphasestelata Convolvulaceae Nali Ni Bhaji

16 Nymphaeastelata Nymphaeaceae Poyana

17 Triumfeittarotundifolia Tiliaceae GolZipti

18 Typhaangustata Typhaceae Ramban

19 Xanthium strumarium Asteraceae Gokhuru

(D) Agricultural Crops

Sr.

No.

Scientific Name

Family Vernacular Name

1 Triticumaestivum Poaceae Gehu

2 Oryza sativa Poaceae Chokha

3 Sorghum vulgare Poaceae Bajra

4 Gossypiumherbaceum Malvaceae Kapas

5 Cuminum Apiaceae Jiru




Table 3.26

Faunal Biodiversity

(A) Amphibia

Sr.

No.

Common Name Scientific Name

1 Skipper Frog Euphlyctiscyanophlytis

2 Common India Toad Bufomelanostictus

(B) Reptilia

Sr. No.

Common Name

Scientific Name

1 Calotes Calotes Versicolor

2 Skink Mabuyacaninata

3 Wall Lizard Hemidoctylusflaviviridis

4 Wall Lizard Ptyas mucous

5 Cobra Najanaja

(C) Birds

Sr.

No.

Common Name

Scientific Name

1 Pond Heron ArdeolaGrayli

2 Cattle Egret Bulbulcus ibis

3 Pariah Kite Milvusmigrans

4 Red Wattled Lapwing Vanellusindicus

5 Black winged stilt Himanatopus Himantopus

6 Common Sandpiper Tringahypoleucos

7 Spotted dove Streptopelia Chinensis

8 Red turtle Dove Streptopliatrenquebarica

9 Blue Rock pigeon Columbia livia

10 Common Kingfisher Alcedoathis

11 White Breasted Kingfisher Halcyon Smyrensis

12 Small Green Bee-Eater Meropsorientalis

13 Indian Roller Corvussplendens

14 House Crow Corvussplendens

15 Common myna Aceredotherestristis

16 Red Vented Bulbal Pycnontuscafer

17 Jungle babbler Turdoidesstriatus

18 Indian Robin Saxicoloides Fulicata

19 House Sparrow Passardomesticus

(D) Mammals

Sr. No.

Common Name

Scientific Name

1 Palm Squirre Funambuluspennati

2 Mongoose Herpestesedwardsii

3 Common Langur Presbytis entellus




(E) Annelida

Sr. No.

Common Name

Scientific Name

1 House Cricket Achetadomesticus

2 cockroach Blattagermanica

3 House fly Muscadomestica

4 Mosquito Anopheles sp.

5 Striped tiger Danausgenutiagenutia

6 Mosquito Culex Sp.

7 Common Grass Yellow Euremahecabe simulate

8 Common Crow Euploea core core

9 Black Ant Pheidole sp.

10 Red Ant Oecophyllasmar

11 Wasp Vespa sp.

12 Bumble Bee Bombus sp.

13 Social Spider Stegodyphusarasinorum

14 Jumping spider Phidippuspunjabensis

15 Lynx Spider Oxyopesshweta

16 Funnel Web spider Hippasa sp.

17 Wolf spider Pardosemukundi

18 Wolf Spider Lycosa sp.

19 Garden Spider Argiopeanasuja




Table 3.27

Traffic Survey

Location: NH-8A (Ahmedabad-Rajkot)

Date of Traffic Survey: 23/01/2018

Two wheeler Three Wheeler Passenger cars Mini Bus Trucks, Buses Multi Exal Total vehicles

Hours V/hr PCU/hr V/hr PCU/hr V/hr PCU/hr V/hr PCU/hr V/hr PCU/hr V/hr PCU/hr v/hr PCU/hr

0.5 0.8 1 1.5 3.5 4.5

06-07 am 60 30.0 31 24.8 243 243.0 25 37.5 175 612.5 29 130.5 563 1078

07-08 am 63 31.5 28 22.4 405 405.0 30 45.0 168 588.0 33 148.5 727 1240

08-09 am 103 51.5 52 41.6 599 599.0 96 144.0 189 661.5 59 265.5 1098 1763

09-10 am 114 57.0 59 47.2 662 662.0 115 172.5 266 931.0 54 243.0 1270 2113

10-11 am 65 32.5 30 24.0 254 254.0 49 73.5 222 777.0 43 193.5 663 1355

11-12 am 69 34.5 27 21.6 216 216.0 55 82.5 139 486.5 39 175.5 545 1017

12-01 pm 94 47.0 22 17.6 277 277.0 40 60.0 121 423.5 30 135.0 584 960

01-02 pm 69 34.5 20 16.0 190 190.0 30 45.0 144 504.0 33 148.5 486 938

02-03 pm 62 31.0 28 22.4 272 272.0 37 55.5 131 458.5 47 211.5 577 1051

03-04 pm 65 32.5 24 19.2 277 277.0 53 79.5 137 479.5 42 189.0 598 1077

04-05 pm 78 39.0 36 28.8 372 372.0 56 84.0 151 528.5 53 238.5 746 1291

05-06 pm 84 42.0 40 32.0 545 545.0 55 82.5 174 609.0 57 256.5 955 1567

06-07 pm 93 46.5 44 35.2 632 632.0 67 100.5 162 567.0 53 238.5 1051 1620

07-08 pm 73 36.5 28 22.4 270 270.0 65 97.5 107 374.5 33 148.5 576 949

08-09 pm 59 29.5 22 17.6 255 255.0 60 90.0 82 287.0 39 175.5 517 855

09-10 pm 39 19.5 12 9.6 130 130.0 40 60.0 155 542.5 56 252.0 432 1014

10-11 pm 33 16.5 8 6.4 114 114.0 27 40.5 157 549.5 47 211.5 386 938

11-12 pm 14 7.0 2 1.6 113 113.0 13 19.5 80 280.0 12 54.0 234 475

12-01 am 12 6.0 1 0.8 99 99.0 11 16.5 61 213.5 16 72.0 200 408

01-02 pm 8 4.0 0 0.0 55 55.0 5 7.5 50 175.0 10 45.0 128 287

02-03 pm 5 2.5 0 0.0 67 67.0 3 4.5 32 112.0 8 36.0 115 222

03-04 pm 7 3.5 0 0.0 91 91.0 0 0.0 37 129.5 5 22.5 140 247

04-05 pm 12 6.0 8 6.4 33 33.0 0 0.0 75 262.5 10 45.0 138 353

05-06 pm 18 9.0 14 11.2 59 59.0 5 7.5 83 290.5 14 63.0 193 440

Total 1299 649.5 536 428.8 6230 6230 937 1405.5 3098 10843 822 3699 12922 23256

Minimum 5 2.5 0 0 33 33 0 0 32 112 5 22.5 115 222

Maximum 114 57 59 47.2 662 662 115 172.5 266 931 59 265.5 1270 2113

The highest peak observed is 2113 PCU/hr during 09.0 am to 10.0 am




Table 3.28 Land Use Pattern

Name of

Village

Total Area

of the

Village

(ha)

Irrigated

by source

(ha)

Un-

irrigated

(ha)

Cultivable

waste

(ha)

Area not

available for

cultivation

(ha)

Balol 4884.7 1670.1 1160.4 100 610

Jansali 1772.59 250.6 346 0 348.1

Mithapur 4579.2 291.6 2603.2 6 0.7

Kaliveji 2328.1 842.2 978.9 0 28.1

Shiyal 7323.5 3010 2811 95 1349.8

Kanotar 1569.6 400 611 140 100

Sarala 1016.4 327.2 495 0 1.6

Rohika 1626.6 854.9 462.8 107 12.2

Bagodara 3372.2 178.8 100.2 574.2 178

Memar 1086.7 405.9 169.1 439.8 2.3

Gundanapara 554.2 193.9 165 6.8 149

Dhingda 2195.8 538.9 710.2 21.4 775

Bhurkhi 1698 464 1100.6 0 0




Table: 3.29 Summary of Socio-economic status of Study area (Demography)

Name of

the Village/

Town/Ward

No. of

Occupied

Residential

House

Total Population

(Including

institutional and

houseless

population)

Literates Total

main

Workers

Marginal

Workers

Cultivators Agricultural

Labourer

Non-

Worker

P M F M F M F M F M F M F M F

Balol 633 2657 1386 1271 1129 871 682 48 109 212 226 3 252 23 595 1011

Jansali 278 1304 681 623 494 362 261 18 140 353 113 5 98 9 280 252

Mithapur 652 3522 1812 1710 1229 780 897 92 85 134 504 22 217 15 830 1484

Kaliveji 129 699 354 345 223 142 166 27 0 6 117 1 25 25 188 312

Shiyal 1361 7485 3883 3602 2046 1166 1975 747 143 941 468 29 1376 694 1765 1914

Kanotar 327 1691 900 791 505 234 457 74 48 68 207 9 210 59 395 649

Sarala 196 939 498 441 226 113 252 53 3 2 115 1 122 52 243 386

Rohika 452 2216 1157 1059 812 455 542 213 60 3 91 6 332 199 555 843

Bagodara 1040 5088 2596 2492 1864 1206 1282 210 162 543 631 129 446 65 1152 1739

Memar 304 1453 778 675 637 459 363 18 14 207 47 3 287 11 401 450

Gundanapara 140 676 362 314 281 173 204 1 3 0 71 0 65 1 155 313

Dhingda 289 1313 675 638 481 334 365 60 8 51 106 5 168 48 302 527

Bhurkhi 351 1836 962 874 767 517 428 17 116 376 146 3 195 7 418 481




Table 3.30: Summary of Socio-economic status of Study area (Amenities)

Name of

Village

Educational

Facility

Medical

Facility

Drinking

Water

Facility

Communi-

cation

(Post or

Telegraph)

Transportati

on Facility

(Bus etc.)

Approach to

Village

Nearest

town and

Distance

(Kms)

Power

Supply

Balol P,S, SS

PHS, MCW(5-10),

TBC(5-10)

T SPO,PH,PCO BS PR,FP Dhandhuk

a

EA

Jansali P, S(5-10) None of within 10km T,TK SPO,PH BS NH, PR, FP Limbdi EA

Mithapur P,S,SS(5-

10)

PHC(5-10), PHS,

MCW(5-10), TBC(5-10),

VH(5-10), FWC(<5)

T,TW,R/

C, TK

PO(5-

10),SPO,PH

BS NH, PR(5-10),

KR(5-10),WBM(5-

10),FP

Bavla EA

Kaliveji P,S(5-10) PHS(5-10) T,TW,TK SPO(5-10),

PH,PCO

BS NH(5-10),PR,KR(5-

10),FP

Bavla EA

Shiyal P(4),S,SS PHS, MCW(5-10), VH T,W,TW,

R/C, TK

PO(5-10),

SPO,PH,PCO

BS NH(5-10), SH, PR,

KR(5-10), WBM(5-

10), FP

Bavla EA

Kanotar P,S(5-10) PHC(5-10),PHS(5-10),

VH(5-10),FWC(5-10)

T,TW,TK PO(5-10),

SPO(5-10), PH,

PCO(5-10)

BS NH(5-10),SH(5-

10),PR,WBM,FP

Bavla EA

Sarala P,S(5-10) PHC(5-10),PHS(5-10),

VH(5-10),FWC(5-10)

T,TW,R/

C, TK

SPO(5-

10),LL,PCO

BS NH(5-10),SH(5-

10),PR,WBM,FP

Bavla EA

Rohika P,S(5-10) PHC(5-10),PHS(5-10),

MCW(5-10)

T PO(5-10), SPO,

LL, PCO (5-10)

BS,RS(5-10) NH,SH,PR,FP Bavla EA

Bagodara P(2),S PHC, PHS,D(5-10),

VH(5-10), FWC

T SPO,PH,PCO BS,RS(5-10) NH,SH,PR,FP Bavla EA

Memar P,S(5-10) PHC(5-10),

PHS(5-10)

T PO(5-10),

SPO(5-10), LL,

PCO

BS,RS(5-10) NH(5-10),SH,PR,FP Bavla EA

Gundanapar

a

P,S(<5) VH(<5), FWC(<5) T,HP,TK PO(<5), SPO(<5),

PH,PCO

BS,RS(5-10) NH(<5),SH,PR,KR,

WBM,FP

Bavla EA

Dhingda P,S(<5) PHC(5-10),PHS(5-10),

MCW(5-10),VH(5-10),

FWC(5-10)

T,TK PO(<5),SPO,PH,

PCO

BS,RS(<5) NH(5-10),SH,

PR(<5),KR(5-

10),WBM,FP

Bavla EA

Bhurkhi P,S(5-10) PHC(5-10),PHS(<5),

MCW(5-10),TBC(5-10),

FWC(5-10)

T,W,TW,

TK

SPO,PH(<5),

PCO

BS,RS NH(<5),SH(5-

10),PR,KR,FP

Dholka EA




Abbreviations:

Educational

PP - Pre-Primary school

P - Primary School

S - Secondary schools

SS - Senior Secondary School

Medical Facility

PHC - Primary Health Centre

PHS - Primary Health Sub-Centre

MCW - Maternity & Child welfare Centre

TBC - T.B. Clinic

FWC - Family Welfare Centre

D - Dispensary

VH - Veterinary Hospital

Drinking Water

T - Tap Water

W - Well Water

TK - Tank/ Pond/ Lake

HP - Hand pump

TW - Tube wells

R/C - River/Canal

Post and Telegraph

PO - Post Office

SPO - Sub Post Office

PH - Telephone Connection

PCO - Public Call Office

Transportation

BS - Bus

RS - Railway Station

Approach to Village

NH - National Highway

SH - State Highway

PR - Pucca Road

KR - Kutchcha Road

FP - Foot Path

WBM - Water Bounded Macadam Road

Power Supply

EA - Electricity for all purposes




Figure 3.7

Location of AAQM station

Indicating AAQM stations

Project site




Figure 3.8

Wind Rose diagram




Figure 3.9

Water sampling Locations

Indicating Ground Water sampling location

Indicating Surface Water Sampling location

Project site




Figure 3.10

Noise monitoring locations

Indicating Noise Monitoring location

Project site




Figure 3.11

Soil Sampling Locations

Indicating locations of Soil sampling

Project site




Figure 3.12 Toposheet of location with site location map of 10 km

radius




Chapter-4

Anticipated Environmental Impacts &

Mitigation Measures

4.1 GENERAL

Environmental Impact can be defined as any change in environmental

conditions which may be adverse or beneficial; occurred due to action or

set of actions under consideration. It can be assessed by identifying the

sources causing the impact and predicting the same. The identification of

environmental impacts has been made by co-relating the relationship

between project activity and environmental parameters. As a part of

present EIA study, anticipated environmental impacts associated with the

project activity of the unit have been identified. The project activities are

usually divided into two phases: Construction Phase and Operation Phase.

For evaluation of impacts due to proposed activities, baseline data has

been utilized. Changes in the environmental parameters & their impact in

terms of short term or long term, positive or negative, reversible &

irreversible are identified & predicted.

The next step is prediction of impacts, which is an important component

in environmental impact assessment process. Several techniques and

methodologies are in vogue for predicting the impacts due to proposed

industrial development on physical, chemical, biological and socio-

economic components of environment. Such predictions delineate

contribution to existing baseline condition for the proposed project. The

additional impacts due to proposed activities are analyzed by keeping in

mind the baseline status. This helps to assess the assimilative capacity of

the environment and in turn the gravity of the impacts. Based on the

identification & prediction of the nature of impact, it can be evaluated

qualitatively and quantitatively.

In this chapter, the effect due to construction & operational activity of the

proposed project is explained.




4.2 IDENTIFICATION OF IMPACT

This chapter deals with the assessment of project impacts on

environment. Mitigation measures are suggested to minimize the likely

negative impacts. The network method (Cause - effect) was adopted to

identify potential impact of the proposed activity. It includes stepwise

study of relationship between an activity and its environmental

parameters. This method involves in the „Road Map‟ type of approach to

the identification of second & third order effect. The basic idea is to

account for the project activity & identify the type of impact that could

initially occur followed by the identification of secondary and tertiary

impact. The project will have impacts of varying magnitude on different

environmental components. These impacts could be categorized as -

Primary impacts, i.e. impacts which occur as a direct result of the

project activities.

Secondary and tertiary impacts, i.e. impacts that occur as a result

of primary impacts.

4.2.1 Identification of Impacting Activities

Various activities involved in the project are divided viz.:

A. Construction phase activities: impacts are immediate, in the vicinity

and sporadic

B. Operation phase activities: impacts are long term, in wide area and

continuous

The activities identified for the project under each phase are:

Construction phase

Excavation

Foundation & Civil work

Transportation of construction materials, equipments & machineries

Installation of equipments & machineries

Operation phase

Plant operation

Material storage & handling

Utilities and services




4.2.2 Identification of Environment Attributes

There are various types of impacts that arise due to the proposed

activities which will be evaluated considering the following environment

parameters in construction and operational phase,

Impact on Topography

Impact on Air Environment

Impact on Water Environment

Impact on Noise Environment

Impact on Land Environment (Hazardous/solid waste generation)

Impact on Biological Environment

Impact on Socio-Economic Environment

Impact on Occupational Health & Safety

4.3 IMPACT ON TOPOGRAPHY

Proposed activities at Genext Steels Pvt. Ltd. (Henceforth Genext) will

be carried out in the new premises at survey nos. 661, 662, 664, 665,

1822 & 1823, Vill: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla, Dist: Ahmedabad. Proposed

land is already converted from agriculture to non-agriculture for industrial

purpose. Land document showing status of non-agriculture land is

attached as Annexure-IV. During the construction, excavated soil will be

restored to its original shape. Thus, the impact during the construction is

reversible, short term and insignificant. During the operational phase of

the project, no major impact is envisaged on the topography.

4.4 IMPACT ON AIR ENVIRONMENT

a. Construction Phase impact & mitigation measures

During construction phase, there will be chances of dust generation due

to the construction activities to be carried out as per the plant design.

These emissions are expected to result in change in baseline air quality,

primarily in the working area only. It will not likely to spread in wider

area. To mitigate the impact, regular sprinkling of the water will be done.

Vehicular traffic may lead to increased concentration of pollutants

through exhaust gases, affecting the ambient air quality of surrounding

areas. Only PUC certified vehicles will be allowed. However, this effect

remains localized near to the plant site and during the time of vehicular




movement only. Thus, overall impact is envisaged as short-term,

negative and reversible in nature. Hence, looking to the overall facts

described above, it can be concluded that, the impacts on air due to the

construction & erection activities will be minimum or negligible.

b. Operational phase impact & mitigation measures

Long term impacts on the air quality are anticipated due to operational

activities. It depends on various factors like process technology,

operation & maintenance, raw material, fuel, air pollution control

measures. For the study of impact assessment for air environment, all

probable emissions are studied including fugitive emission. The sources of

impacts and mitigation measures are described in below section.

Emission from the point source (Stack)

In the proposed steel plant, flue gas emission will be from stacks

attached with pellet plant, stacks of DRI kiln, Induction furnace, FBC

boiler where Dolochar (by products of DRI kiln) & imported coal will be

used as a fuel. Other emission source will be standby D.G. sets. HSD will

be used as fuel, which will be used on in case of emergency, the flue gas

emission from D.G. set will be discharged at height as per standards.

Estimated emission levels are tabulated in Table 4.1.

Fugitive emission

Fugitive emissions are expected during storage, handling and conveying

of coal, iron ore and other raw materials. Dust will be generated during

loading and unloading, transportation of material through conveyors,

crushing and screening operations of these products. Fugitive emission

will also be generated due to vehicular movement in the premises.

Mitigation Measures

Unit will provide dust suction system to control fugitive emission

generated from melting of scrap.

Unit will provide dust suppression system (water sprinklers) in coal

unloading area & transfer points of material handling.

Bag filter will be provided for the extraction of dust particles to the

stack attached with induction furnace.

Continuous casting operation is selected for the production of billets.





prevent flying of dust during conveying.

Electro Static Precipitator (ESP) will be provided to bring down the

PM to 50 mg/Nm3 for DRI plant and 30 mg/Nm3 for power plant.

Fly ash will be stored in covered sheds only.

All the internal roads will be paved/concreted.

Greenbelt will be developed around the plant.

4.4.1 Air Pollution Dispersion Modeling of stack

Following sub-section give air dispersion modeling details for prediction of

changes in GLC of pollutants emitted from the above stacks.

Objectives: The objective of dispersion modeling is to predict the GLC of

pollutants during the operation of the project and its impact on ambient

air quality of the area concentrations and compare with applicable

NAAQS.

Model used: The impact on air quality due to emissions from single

source or group of sources is evaluated by using mathematical models.

The impacts of air pollutants were predicted using Gaussian air dispersion

model, which is selected on the basis of existence of multiple point

sources within the industrial complex and the plain terrain at the project

site. In order to predict the impact of air pollutants on ambient air

quality, ISCST3 model (Industrial Source Complex – Short Term

dispersion model) of United State Environmental Protection Agency

(USEPA) was used by considering guidelines stipulated by CPCB for air

pollution dispersion modeling. The Gaussian model provides estimates of

pollutant concentrations at various receptor locations.

It is an hour-by-hour steady state Gaussian model which takes into

account the following:

Terrain adjustments

Stack-tip downwash

Gradual plume rise

Buoyancy-induced dispersion, and

Plume reflection off elevated terrain

Building down wash




Partial penetration of elevated inversions is accounted for Hourly

source emission rates, exit velocity and stack gas temperature

Only two stability conditions based on the meteorology aspects were used

to calculate the theoretical maximum ground level concentration to

compare the actual data and data generated from mathematical

modeling, it highlights that the stability condition E & A-B were

predominant in the region.

Following are the assumptions made while using the model:

- No dry and wet depletion of pollutants

- Receptors are on flat terrain

4.4.2 Model Input data

Emission

Stack emissions data have been used for prediction of incremental GLC

values of PM, SO2, NOx. Emission data from various stacks are given in

Table 4.1.

Receptor Network

Uniform polar grid and ambient air monitoring locations are considered as

discrete Cartesian receptor network for entire study area of 10 km radius.

Meteorological data

Hourly micrometeorological data collected during the study period (Jan,

2018 to March, 2018) have been used for modeling. The hourly wind

speed, wind direction are collected at site. Data of solar insolation, total

cloud cover were collected from IMD department. These data use for

determination of the hourly atmospheric stability classes (defined by

Pasquill and Gifford as A to F, A being most unstable and F being most

stable). Mixing heights published in „Spatial distribution of hourly mixing

depths over Indian region‟ by CPCB have been used for site specific

mixing heights.

4.4.3 Output of the model

The 24-hourly average GLC values from the proposed project have been

computed for PM, SO2, NOx considering topographical features around

the plant & applicable stability classes. The maximum 50 (24-hr) average

concentration values for PM, SO2, NOx are given in Table 4.3 to 4.5.




Corresponding Isopleths for 24-hourly predicted value for proposed

scenario is generated which is shown in Figure 4.1 to 4.3.

From the computed result, obtained highest 24-hourly average GLCs

values for PM, SO2, NOx from the proposed activity are 11.741 g/m3,

8.423 g/m3 and 7.842 g/m3 respectively. These GLCs are expected to

occur at a distance of 1.0 km from the source in S direction. With this

marginal contribution due to the proposal of the project, the levels of PM,

SO2 & NOx will remain well below the 24-hourly ambient air quality

standards for SO2 & NOx (80 g/m3), PM10 (100 g/m3) prescribed by

CPCB.

4.4.4 Incremental & cumulative concentration of pollutants

The maximum incremental GLCs due to the proposed project for SPM,

SO2, NOx is superimposed on the baseline concentrations recorded during

the study period to arrive at the likely resultant concentrations after

implementation of the proposed plant. The cumulative concentrations

(baseline + incremental) of the project is tabulated at Table 4.2.

4.4.5 Conclusion

The modeling study proved that, the air emissions from the proposed

activities would not likely to cause any significant impact on the ambient

air quality of the study area. This is because the proposed plant will have

highly efficient air pollution control equipment to control the emissions.

The ambient air quality around project site will remain within the National

Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) prescribed for residential area.

4.5 IMPACT ON WATER ENVIRONMENT

The main sources of impact on water environment will be due to

withdrawal of fresh water from the ground during construction and

operation phase. These are discussed below:

a. Construction Phase impacts & mitigation measures

During construction work, water requirement is estimated to be about 50

KLD depending upon nature of construction work and it will be satisfied

from bore well. In addition to this, about 5-8 KLD water will be required

for domestic activities of the construction staff which will also be met

through the same source. There will be no major wastewater generation




from the construction work. Hence, it can be concluded that there will be

no adverse impact during construction phase.

b. Operational Phase impacts & mitigation measures

Water requirement

Total water requirement for the proposed project will be 1018 KLD; out of

which 905 KLD will be fresh water requirement & 113 KLD will be recycle/

treated water. This includes make-up water for pellet plant, DRI Kiln,

Induction Furnace, Rolling Mill, Power Plant. Domestic water requirement

will be 25 KLD. Water required for the proposed project will be sourced

from Ground Water (Borewell).

Wastewater generation


m3/day. There will be no effluent generation from pellet plant, DRI plant,

Induction Furnace & Rolling mill as closed circuit cooling system will be

adopted. Effluent from power plant (boiler blow down & cooling bleed off)

& reject of water treatment will be treated in ETP and after achieving

SPCB norms, part of the effluent will be directly reused for slag cooling

and part of it will be passed through RO. RO reject will be taken to Multi

Effect Evaporator (MEE). RO permeate and condensate of MEE will be

reused in utility. Thus, unit proposed to achieve Zero Liquid Discharge

(ZLD). Sewage (20 KLD) will be treated in STP and utilized for green belt

development.

The details of water consumption and wastewater generation are depicted

in Table 2.6. Water balance diagram is given in Figure 2.6.

c. Impact Assessment

As fresh water will be extracted from ground, there will be significant

impact on the ground water table. However, it will be balanced by

recharging ground water during the monsoon season by collecting rain

water from the plant area and adjacent area and recharged to the

aquifer. Detailed calculation of rain water harvesting is given in

Annexure-VI. Rain water harvesting pits will be installed to recharge the

ground water. The depth of ground water table will certainly increase due




to rain water recharging. Hence there will not be any adverse impact on

water environment due to the proposed project.

Mitigation Measures:

Minimum use of water will be done for construction phase.

Maximum use of treated water during operational phase.

Regular maintenance of rain water harvesting system shall be

undertaken to have effective recharge.

4.6 IMPACT ON NOISE ENVIRONMENT

Any unwanted sound that creates disturbance in hearing is termed as

Noise. Hence, it is important to assess the present noise quality of the

area in order to predict the potential impact of future noise levels due to

the project.

a. Construction Phase Impact & mitigation measures

During the construction phase, the major sources of noise generation are

civil works such as trenching, foundation, mechanical works, loading &

unloading activities, installation of new equipments/ machineries

construction equipment like dozers, scrapers, concrete mixer, cranes,

generators, compressors, vibrators etc. as well as some impact due to

vehicular movements. The operation of these equipments will generate

noise ranging between 70-85 dB(A). The noise produced during the

construction will have significant impact on the existing ambient noise

levels. The construction equipment has high noise levels which can affect

the personnel operating the machines.

However, the exposure of construction labor and supervisors to this high

noise levels will be for a short time only and hence will not pose any

health hazards. Also, since the populated areas are away from the

proposed site, these noise levels are considered to have insignificant

impact. Overall, the impact of generated noise on the environment will be

insignificant, reversible and local in nature and mainly confined to the day

hours. Major construction work will be carried during the day time.

Further, workers working in the high noise areas will be provided with

necessary protective devices like ear plug, ear-muffs etc. Regular




maintenance & lubrication of machineries will be undertaken to reduce

the noise generation.

b. Operational Phase Impact & mitigation measures

During the operation phase, main sources of noise within the plants are:

operation of furnaces, boiler, EMS, process plant, etc. and material

handling systems. The noise anticipated from the project will be confined

only within plant boundary. Suitable noise control system will be provided

in conformity with ISO 3746. All the equipments for the project will be

designed/ operated in such a way that the noise level in work place shall

not exceed 85 dB(A) as per the criteria enforced by OSHA (Occupation

Safety and Health Administration).

The results of baseline monitoring carried out in the region are presented

in Chapter-3. The results are below the standards prescribed for

Industrial environment. It can be concluded that, the impact on noise

environment will be long term but insignificant. However, proper noise

preventive measures have been taken to minimize the noise pollution like

ear plugs, dampers to the furnace, efficient silencers to the vehicles, etc.

Mitigation measures:

Adequate oiling & lubrication will be done to reduce noise generation.

PPEs like ear plug & ear muff will be provided to workers working in

high noise area.

Silencers, anti-vibration pad, acoustic enclosure to equipment will be

provided.

The air compressor, process air blower, boiler, turbine inlet will be

provided with acoustic enclosure;

Design/installation precautions will be taken as specified by the

manufacturers with respect to noise control and will be strictly

adhered.

Housing/casing will be provided for all noise generating machines.

Periodic maintenance of machinery and vehicles shall be undertaken.

Adequate greenbelt will be developed in the plant premises which will

serve as the efficient barrier and result in prevention of noise

propagation outside plant premises.




Thus, impact on the environment during the operation phase will be long

term but, insignificant quantitatively.

4.7 IMPACT ON LAND ENVIRONMENT

The main source of impact on land and soil environment will be due to

construction activities and hazardous waste disposal.

a. Construction Phase Impact & mitigation measures

The construction activities like excavation, clearing, foundation, leveling &

vehicular movements will entail change in the landscape, which are

expected to be of short duration and insignificant. Unit will provide

sanitation facilities for the staff engaged in construction work which will

prevent the impacts on land. Thus, there will not be any issue of impacts

on land during the construction phase.

b. Operational Phase impact (Solid & Hazardous Waste)

During the operation phase, it is identified that the impacts on land would

occur due to the contamination by solid & hazardous wastes. The

hazardous wastes are the major source of impacts on land. Hazardous

waste generation from project must be considered to identify the

potential impacts. At Genext, entire quantity of the solid & hazardous

waste will be stored in the isolated hazardous waste storage area within

premises having impervious platform with RCC floor, roof cover &

leachate collection system and disposed as per the scientific method.

Main source of hazardous waste generation will be ETP sludge, MEE salt,

Used Oil, and Discarded Drums/containers. ETP sludge & MEE salt will be

disposed to approved TSDF site for landfilling. Used oil will be sold to

registered re-processors. Discarded drums/containers will be sold to

registered recyclers. The unit will provide isolated area with impervious

flooring & roof cover for the storage of hazardous waste. Entire quantity

of hazardous waste will be handled & disposed as per Hazardous & Other

waste (Management & Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016.


The solid wastes generation includes fly ash, Dolochar, Mill scales and

slag. Ash will be sold to brick manufacturing units. Dolochar will be used

in FBC power plant as fuel/brick manufacturing. Slag after crushing and




iron removal, used in road construction/brick manufacturing. Mill scales

will be reused in the Pellet Plant.

Details of all solid & hazardous waste and its disposal methods are given

in Table 2.11. Hence, there will be no adverse impact on the land

environment likely to occur, and no significant negative impact is

envisaged on the surrounding soil quality.

4.8 IMPACT ON BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

a. Construction phase impact & mitigation measures

This is a Greenfield project; hence minor cutting of trees/shrubs will be

done to clean the area. However, it will be balanced by developing

greenbelt within premises and along the roads. Various trees, shrubs and

herbs are found in and around it, a list of which is given in baseline. None

of the plants are in the list of endangered plant species. Also, the trees

are identified for their sensitivity & pollution tolerance capacity. This

concept helps to plan the greenbelt of the area making it less polluted

and a pollution absorber. Thus, it is envisaged that there will not be any

adverse impacts on the biological environment in construction phase.

b. Operational phase impact & mitigation measures

There are no protected areas like national park/wildlife sanctuary within

the 10 km radial of the project site, so there will not be any significant

impact on ecology. No endangered floral or faunal species has been

recorded within the study area. Further, unit will develop greenbelt to

enhance the biological feature of the site. Also, the trees are identified for

their sensitivity & pollution tolerance capacity.

Following is the list of trees which are helpful as pollution absorber and at

the same time pollution sensitive.

Family

Name

Botanical Name Common

Name

Sensitive Tolerant

Anacardiaceae Mangiferaindica Mango Cement dust,

Coal dust,

SO2

Dust collector

Anonaceae Polyalthialongifolia Asopalav SO2 Dust collector

Caesalpini-

aceae

Cassia fistula Garmalo Cement dust,

Poor Dust

collector, SO2

N.A




Family

Name

Botanical Name Common

Name

Sensitive Tolerant

Delonixregia Gulmohar SO2, Fly ash,

Cement dust

N.A

Meliaceae Azadirachtaindica Neem Cement dust SO2

Mimosaceae Pithecellobiumdulce Gorasamli N.A Better Dust

collector, SO2

There will not be discharge of effluent from Genext, and entire quantity of

hazardous waste will be handled & disposed as per Hazardous & Other

waste (Management & Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016. Hence

there will not be any impact on aquatic ecology of the surrounding area.

GLCs of air pollutants will remain low and hence no significant impact on

terrestrial ecology is expected. Thus, there will not be any significant

impact on ecological environment due to proposed activities.

4.9 IMPACT ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

a. Construction Phase Impacts & mitigation measures

The construction phase induces employment opportunities for the local

people. To the maximum extent possible, construction workers will be

employed from within the study area. Around 150-200 workers will be

employed in the construction work. This will increase construction

employment in the study area. The dwelling of construction workers at

the site may cause sanitation and other problems. As the villages are

nearby and staying facilities are readily available in these villages, the

construction workers may not be required to stay at the project site.

Safety and health care of workers is also an important factor to be

considered during construction phase. Constructional and occupational

safety measures will be adopted during construction phase of the

industry. As the construction phase for the proposed project will be of few

months, the impact would be temporary. Unskilled labour will become

semi-skilled and semi-skilled will become skilled ones. A construction

force will be created.

b. Operation Phase Impacts & mitigation measures

The proposed unit will be located in private land, so no displacement of

person is envisaged. Unit will provide employment opportunity to locally

available skilled and un-skilled labours at different level as per the




requirement, which in turn result into a positive impact on prevailing

socio-economic environment. For the proposed activities, 500-700 nos. of

workers will be employed. In addition, employment will be generated by

the secondary supporting activities e.g. transportation, communication,

daily utility services providers. Surrounding area has got good

educational facilities and most of employees will come from the

surrounding area. Thus, overall impacts on socio-economic environment

are long term and positive in nature. Many ancillary industries will be

erected for supplying, repair and maintenance components.

4.10 IMPACT ON OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY

a. Construction Phase Impacts & mitigation measures

In the Construction phase, some effects on occupational health & safety

of the employees working in the site are envisaged. Major health issues

encountered will be physical hazards & accidental Hazard. All plans and

construction schedule will be followed as per relevant laws approved by

competent authority, so as to minimize the occupational health hazards.

Mitigation Measures

Necessary PPEs like helmets, ear plug/ear muff, safety shoes,

goggles etc. will be provided to workers.

Incident/accident reporting system will be developed and all the

employees will be made aware for the same.

Periodic inspection & testing of equipments & machineries will be

done.

People working at height will be provided with safety belts and

other protective gears.

b. Operational Phase Impacts & mitigation measures

In operational phase, various effects on occupational health and safety of

the employees working in the plant are envisaged. Major health and

safety issues encountered will be physical hazards, respiratory hazards,

electrical hazards, noise, fire hazards associated while working within the

plant. Preventive safety measures shall be taken to minimize the risk of

accident.




Mitigation Measures

Emergency preparedness plan should be implemented.

First aid/other emergency treatment should be provided.

Workers shall be well equipped with personal protective

equipments. Only authorized persons will be allowed inside the

plant.

A health monitoring program shall be in place to monitor the health

of the persons working on the site to ensure the health status of all

concerned.

Fire hydrant system, fire extinguishers will be installed at different

locations within premises.

Sign boards will be displayed at designated locations indicating

appropriate hazard warnings.

Good house-keeping will be ensured within the factory premises.

4.11 PREDICTION OF IMPACT DUE TO VEHICULAR MOVEMENT

Raw materials, products & wastes will be transported in covered trucks by

road. Avenue plantation will be developed on both sides of village road

leading to the plant site. The traffic load is to be increased due to

proposed project for the transportation of finished goods and raw

materials.

Baseline/ Existing Traffic Scenario & Level of Services

The road from Bagodara-Rajkot-Bagodara is four lane road with divider

(two ways) and all types of vehicles move on the road.

Capacity of road as per IRC = 3600 PCU‟s/hr.

Total Volume during Peak Hours = 2113 PCU‟s/hr

(Section 3.14 & Table 3.27 – Chapter 3)

Existing Volume/Capacity ratio = 2113/3600

= 0.587

The Existing level of service is “C” that is good but near to Fair

Traffic Scenario & Level of Services: During Construction

During construction phase, local labors of around 150-200 will be

employed. Additional traffic from proposed project construction will be,

(i) estimated 10 trucks/tanker per hour or 35 PCU/hr and




(ii) three to four cars estimated per hour or 4 PCU/hr.

Total volume during peak hours during construction of the project

= existing during peak hours + additional due to construction

= 2113 + 35 + 4

= 2152 PCU/hr.

Volume/Capacity ratio during construction = 2152/3600

= 0.597

The level of service is “C” that is good but near to Fair

Traffic Scenario & Level of Services: During operational level

Additional traffic from proposed project operation will be,

Purpose Numbers of

vehicles per

day

PCU/day PCU/day

(total in and

out movement)

PCU/hr

(total)

a b = a x average PCU

c = b x 2 d = c/24

Trucks for raw

materials

transport

135 trucks/tankers

per day

472.5 (135 x 3.5)

945 (647.5 x 2)

39.4

car and motorcycle

100 PCU/day 200 8.3

Trucks for

finished materials

transport

50

trucks/tankers per day

(1000 TPD production/

20 ton per truck)

175

(50 x 3.5)

350

(175 x 2)

14.6

Total 1495 62.3

Total volume during peak hours during operation of the project

= existing during peak hours + additional due to operation

= 2113 + 62.3

= 2175.3 PCU/hr.

Volume/Capacity ratio during construction = 2175.3/3600

= 0.604

The level of service is “D” that is Fair.




Conclusion:

The methodology adopted for carrying out the traffic study was to select

the major roads around the project site and count the various categories

of vehicles moving on these roads. The traffic survey was carried out on

the approach road to the proposed project from the national highway NH-

8A. From the study it is observed that there will be no major impact on

traffic due to the proposed project. Additionally, six lane road

constructions are in progress which will lead to improved Level of

Service.

PCU/hr

Baseline/

Existing

During

Construction

During

Operation

Capacity of road as per IRC

3600 3600 3600

Additional traffic -- 39 62.3

Total Volume during

Peak Hours

2113 2152 2175.3

Existing Volume/ Capacity ratio

0.587 0.597 0.604

Level of service C (Good) ~ D (Fair)

C (Good) ~ D (Fair)

D (Fair)




Table 4.1

Input data for air quality modeling

Sr.

No.

Stack attached to Stack

Height (m)

Temp.

(0k)

Velocity

(m/s)

Dia.

(m)

Concentration (g/s)

PM SO2 NOX

1 Pellet Plant, Kiln-1 31.0 373 5.5 1.00 0.130 0.151 0.130




5 D G Set (300 kVA x

4 nos.) (Stand by)

11.0

each

453 15.0 0.30 0.058 0.026 0.037

6 Rotary Kiln-1 48.0 423 5.0 1.80 0.382 0.445 0.382

7 Rotary Kiln-2 48.0 423 5.0 1.80 0.382 0.445 0.382

8 Rotary Kiln-3 48.0 423 5.0 1.80 0.382 0.445 0.382

9 Rotary Kiln-4 48.0 423 5.0 1.80 0.382 0.445 0.382


4 nos.) (Stand by)

15.0

each

453 15.0 0.375 0.091 0.041 0.058

11 Induction furnace-1 30.0 373 5.5 1.00 0.151 -- --





4 nos.) (Stand by)

11.0

each

453 15.0 0.300 0.058 0.026 0.037

16 WHRB boiler 75.0 423 7.5 2.00 0.589 1.060 0.942

17 FBC Boiler 30.0 423 7.5 1.20 0.382 0.382 0.339

18 Vent of process

area cleaning for

Rotary Kiln-1,

5 Nos.

11.0

each

373 5.0 0.450 0.028 -- --

19 Vent of process

area cleaning for

Rotary Kiln-2,

5 Nos.

11.0

each

373 5.0 0.450 0.028 -- --

20 Vent of process

area cleaning for

Rotary Kiln-3,

5 Nos.

11.0

each

373 5.0 0.450 0.028 -- --

21 Vent of process

area cleaning for

Rotary Kiln-4,

5 Nos.

11.0

each

373 5.0 0.450 0.028 -- --




Table 4.2

Cumulative Concentrations at various locations

Station Direction Dist.

(Km)

Baseline

Concentration

(g/m3)

Predicted GLC

(g/m3)

Cumulative

Concentration

(g/m3)

PM SO2 NOx PM SO2 NOx PM SO2 NOx

Project site (A1) -- 0.0 64.9 13.6 19.6 5.0 1.5 1.5 69.90 15.10 21.10

Bagodra (A2) ENE (UW) 3.29 67.6 14.4 16.2 1.0 1.5 1.5 68.60 15.90 17.70

Sarala (A3) NE (UW) 5.57 66.4 11.9 14.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 66.40 11.90 14.40

Rohika (A4) ENE (UW) 7.84 73.4 15.8 16.6 1.0 0.75 0.0 74.40 16.55 16.60

Shiyal (A5) N (UW) 6.22 65.4 12.7 17.4 4.0 3.0 3.0 69.40 15.70 20.40

Gundanapara

(A6)

SE (DW) 3.52 66.5 13.3 16.1 2.0 1.5 1.5 68.50 14.80 17.60

Mithapur (A7) WSW (DW) 4.08 65.4 12.8 15.5 2.0 2.25 2.25 67.40 15.05 17.75

Jansali (A8) SW (DW) 6.20 59.7 10.9 13.6 2.0 1.5 1.5 61.70 12.40 15.10

National Ambient Air Quality Standards 100 80 80




Table 4.3 The 24-hourly average GLC Concentration Values for SPM

RANK CONC RECEPTOR (XR,YR) TYPE RANK CONC RECEPTOR (XR,YR) TYPE

1 11.741 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 26 6.944 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

2 11.673 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 27 6.941 ( .00, 3000.00) GC

3 11.260 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 28 6.827 ( 5000.00, -2000.00) GC

4 10.642 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 29 6.805 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

5 10.549 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 30 6.706 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC

6 10.056 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 31 6.689 ( -3000.00, -3000.00) GC

7 9.273 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 32 6.643 ( .00, -3000.00) GC

8 9.039 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 33 6.608 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC

9 9.024 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 34 6.437 ( -5000.00, -2000.00) GC

10 8.973 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 35 6.369 ( 2000.00, -2000.00) GC

11 8.872 ( .00, 1000.00) GC 36 6.351 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

12 8.763 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC 37 6.226 ( .00, 4000.00) GC

13 8.667 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 38 6.209 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC

14 8.476 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 39 6.107 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

15 8.212 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 40 6.073 ( .00, -5000.00) GC

16 7.949 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 41 6.049 ( -5000.00, -2000.00) GC

17 7.922 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 42 5.997 ( .00, -2000.00) GC

18 7.852 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 43 5.946 ( .00, -2000.00) GC

19 7.833 ( .00, 2000.00) GC 44 5.918 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC

20 7.591 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 45 5.810 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC

21 7.495 ( 1000.00, -1000.00) GC 46 5.785 ( 1000.00, -1000.00) GC

22 7.395 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 47 5.777 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC

23 7.114 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 48 5.763 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

24 7.102 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 49 5.730 ( .00, -5000.00) GC

25 7.080 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC 50 5.662 ( .00, -1000.00) GC

Note: Receptor Types: GC = Grid cart, Concentration in µg/m3




Table 4.4 The 24-hourly average GLC Concentration Values for SO2


1 8.423 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 26 5.276 ( -3000.00, -3000.00) GC

2 8.305 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 27 5.222 ( .00, 2000.00) GC

3 7.700 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 28 5.083 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

4 7.151 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 29 5.034 ( .00, -3000.00) GC

5 6.945 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 30 5.012 ( 1000.00, -1000.00) GC

6 6.762 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 31 4.925 ( .00, 3000.00) GC

7 6.644 (-1000.00, -1000.00) GC 32 4.899 ( -5000.00, -2000.00) GC

8 6.604 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 33 4.890 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

9 6.588 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 34 4.859 ( .00, -5000.00) GC

10 6.485 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC 35 4.767 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC

11 6.150 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 36 4.750 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC

12 6.100 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 37 4.708 ( 2000.00, -2000.00) GC

13 6.078 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 38 4.667 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

14 5.872 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 39 4.656 ( .00, 4000.00) GC

15 5.786 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 40 4.649 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

16 5.710 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 41 4.590 ( .00, -5000.00) GC

17 5.645 ( .00, -4000.00) GC 42 4.536 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

18 5.625 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 43 4.527 ( .00, -2000.00) GC

19 5.585 ( 5000.00, -2000.00) GC 44 4.498 ( .00, -2000.00) GC

20 5.579 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 45 4.485 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC

21 5.542 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 46 4.458 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

22 5.444 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 47 4.401 ( 5000.00, -2000.00) GC

23 5.418 ( -5000.00, -2000.00) GC 48 4.363 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

24 5.375 ( .00, 1000.00) GC 49 4.356 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

25 5.292 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC 50 4.311 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC





Table 4.5 The 24-hourly average GLC Concentration Values for NOx


1 7.842 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 26 4.820 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC

2 7.835 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 27 4.758 ( -3000.00, -3000.00) GC

3 7.077 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 28 4.747 ( 1000.00, -1000.00) GC

4 6.754 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 29 4.632 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

5 6.572 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 30 4.578 ( .00, -3000.00) GC

6 6.328 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 31 4.537 ( .00, 3000.00) GC

7 6.181 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 32 4.403 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

8 6.074 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 33 4.401 ( -5000.00, -2000.00) GC

9 5.975 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 34 4.368 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC

10 5.917 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC 35 4.360 ( .00, -5000.00) GC

11 5.704 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 36 4.326 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC

12 5.675 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 37 4.308 ( 2000.00, -2000.00) GC

13 5.650 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 38 4.238 ( .00, 4000.00) GC

14 5.543 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 39 4.194 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

15 5.364 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 40 4.159 ( .00, -5000.00) GC

16 5.224 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 41 4.129 ( .00, -2000.00) GC

17 5.201 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 42 4.123 ( .00, -2000.00) GC

18 5.179 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 43 4.114 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

19 5.123 ( .00, 1000.00) GC 44 4.089 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

20 5.103 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 45 4.084 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

21 5.085 ( .00, -4000.00) GC 46 4.003 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC

22 5.043 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 47 3.992 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

23 5.006 ( 5000.00, -2000.00) GC 48 3.948 ( 5000.00, -2000.00) GC

24 4.895 ( .00, 2000.00) GC 49 3.937 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

25 4.858 ( -5000.00, -2000.00) GC 50 3.885 ( .00, -2000.00) GC





Figure 4.1: Isopleths for Ground Level Concentrations for SPM




Figure 4.2: Isopleths for Ground Level Concentrations for SO2




Figure 4.3: Isopleths for Ground Level Concentrations for NOx



Chapter-5

Analysis of Alternatives

5.1 PROLOGUE

Alternative analysis is the process of analyzing the proposed location for

suitability for basic necessities to operate the plant safely and for any

alternate technology. This analysis also covers the environmental aspect

of pollution prevention and improvement in quality of life in the project

vicinity. The project alternative is the course of action in place of another,

that would meet the same purpose and need, but which would avoid or

minimize negative impacts and enhance project benefits. Such projects

may result in specific impacts which can be avoided or mitigated by

adherence to certain predetermined performance standards, guidelines or

design criteria. Alternative approaches may therefore be more effective in

integrating environmental and social concerns into the project planning

process.

5.2 SITE ALTERNATIVE

Alternative sites examined for the proposed project

The following three alternative sites have been considered for the

proposed steel plant before finalize the site.

Description Site-1 Site-2 Site-3

Location (Village) Bagodara Shiyal Kothatalavdi

Geographical Coordinates

22°37'35.22"N 72° 9'48.72"E

22°41'47.77"N 72° 9'40.61"E

22°39'40.13"N 72° 4'43.94"E

Areas falling under the critically polluted areas

(within 10 Kms. Radius)

No No No

National Parks/Wildlife

Sanctuaries/Bird Sanctuaries/Tiger

reserve/Elephant corridors/Migratory routes for Birds/Forest

(within 10 Kms. of the project site)

Nalsarovar Bird

sanctuary 12.0 Kms

Nalsarovar Bird

sanctuary 7.84 Kms

Nalsarovar Bird

sanctuary 4.5 Kms

Sensitive Areas with 10 Kms. radius of the site

Outside the ESZ

Nalsarovar Bird sanctuary

- 7.84 Kms and falling in

Ecosentive Zone

Nalsarovar Bird sanctuary

- 4.5 Kms and falling in

Ecosentive Zone



Land Use

Land use pattern Agriculture non irrigated

land

Agriculture land irrigated land

Agriculture land irrigated land

Number of habitable structures within site

None None None

Number of habitable structures within 0.5

km radius from the project boundary

None 2 structures in agriculture farm

5 structures in agriculture farm

Numbers village within 1 km radius from the

project boundary

None None None

Numbers village within

2.5 km radius from the project boundary

None 2 villages 2 villages

Number of schools within 1.0 km of site

None One primary school

One primary school

Land Availability

Ranked based on availability of barren/

waste/un-irrigated lands

Private Agriculture

land purchased from farmer

with market rate

Non irrigated land

No

rehabilitation or

resettlement

Irrigated lands Irrigated lands

Transport – Ranked on

the ease of accessibility and networking of Roads, Rail, Air,

Waterways along with logistic centers and

connectivity to port

Easy accessibility

of road network, Around 50.0 km from Ahmedabad

a Metropolitan city with national

and international connectivity for business by Rail,

Air etc. Kandla port

Waterways connectivity for

import/export of raw materials and products.

Easy

accessibility of road network, Around 45.0 km

from Ahmedabad a

Metropolitan city with national and

international connectivity for

business by Rail, Air etc.

Kandla port Waterways connectivity for

import/export of raw materials

and products.

Easy

accessibility of road network, Around 46.0 km

from Ahmedabad a

Metropolitan city with national and international

connectivity for business by Rail,

Air etc. Kandla port

Waterways connectivity for import/export of

raw materials and products.

Proximity to from raw

material source and market)

Ship breaking

yard “Alang” Bhavnagar a

Ship braking


Ship braking




major RM source

far 135 km far from the project

site.

major RM

source far 138 km far from the

project site.

major RM source

far 140 km far from the project

site.

Infrastructure – Ranked

on basis of safe ground water blocks

Area falls under

the safe zone as per the CGWA classification.

Area falls under

the safe Zone as per the CGWA

classification.

Area falls under

the safe Zone as per the CGWA classification.

Based on above, Site # 1 at Bagodara Village has been selected for the

proposed project. Major criteria for selection of this site are:

No forest land involved and land is converted into non-agriculture

activity

No Religious and Historic Places or Archaeological Monuments within

10 km radius from the project site (Nearest Archaeological Monument

- Lothal is 15.0 km from the project site).

Other required facilities like infrastructure, communication, medical

facilities, unskilled & skilled manpower, fuel, water, power, and raw

materials, are readily available, too.

No prime agricultural land converted into industrial site (Proposed

Land yields poor agriculture productivities).

Land area is sufficiently large to provide space for appropriate EMS.

No Major settlements within 25 km radius from the project site.

The site boundary is approachable at about 523.45 m from

Ahmedabad- Rajkot Highway (NH-8A).

Therefore, the present site fulfills all the basic requirements of the

proposed industry and the statutory requirement of the MoEF&CC and

hence this site is considered.

5.3 PROCESS ALTERNATIVE

The manufacturing technology inter alia include manufacturing of pellets



Furnace (IF) along with concast; manufacturing of Structural Steel, TMT

bars & Rolled products through continuous Rolling Mill; power generation

through WHRB & FBC Boiler.



Above integrated plant technology will be helpful to conserve around 30%

of energy by way of direct hot material/mass transfer from one process

to another process. Waste Heat will be utilized for power generations

which also reduce fuel cost around 25%. Manufacturing technologies for

all the units proposed in the project are well proven technologies all over

the world.

There will not be any risk of technological failures from this plant.

Additionally, it involves minimized handling of raw materials and high rate

of energy conservation. Hence, no alternative technologies are considered

better for the present, for an integrated steel plant.




Chapter-6

Environmental Monitoring Programme

6.1 PRELUDE

Environment monitoring is the sampling and analysis tool to know the

environment conditions at particular time. The record of environmental

monitoring is most important as the environmental changes are slow in

nature and impact appears after many years. Environmental Monitoring is

the technical heart of assessment of environmental and social impacts

arising due to implementation of the proposed project. An equally

essential element of this process is to develop measures to eliminate,

offset or reduce impacts to acceptable levels during implementation and

operation of projects. The integration of such measures into project

implementation and operation is supported by clearly defining the

environmental requirements within an Environmental Management Plan.

Genext Steels Private Limited proposes to set up mini integrated steel

plant at Village: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla, Dist. Ahmedabad, Gujarat. The

environmental monitoring programme is developed as below.

6.2 ENVIRONMENT MONITORING PROGRAM

Regular monitoring of environmental parameters like air, water, noise,

soil and performance of pollution control facilities and safety measures in

the plant are vital for proper Environmental management of any industrial

project. Therefore, the company shall create environmental monitoring

facilities by the environmental and safety department to monitor air and

water pollutants as per the guideline of GPCB & CPCB. Moreover, air and

water quality shall be monitored by outside agencies authorized by GPCB

at regular frequencies. This department shall also carry out periodical

checkup of fire and safety equipments.

6.3 OBJECTIVE OF MONITORING PLAN

The basic objective of implementing a monitoring plan on a regular basis

is as follows:

To know the pollution status within the plant and its vicinity.

Generate data for corrective action in respect of pollution.




Correlate the production operations with emission & control

mechanism.

Examine the performance of pollution control system.

Assess the Environmental impacts.

Remedial measures and environment management plan reverse the

impacts.

6.4 SCHEDULE FOR ENVIRONMENT MONITORING

The environmental monitoring will be scheduled on regular interval to

assess the conditions. The record of these monitoring will be compared

with the baseline study to know the changes in environmental conditions.

The post-project environmental monitoring suggested herewith should be

as per the following guideline.

The highlights of the integrated environmental monitoring plan are:

The stack monitoring facilities like ladder, platform and porthole at

all the stacks will be maintained in good condition.

Regular monitoring of all gaseous emissions from stacks/vents.

The performance of air pollution control equipment evaluated based

on these monitoring results.

Water consumption will be recorded daily.

As far as possible, noise curbed at its source, with the help of

acoustic hoods and other such noise reducing equipment. Regular

noise level monitoring will be carried out to ascertain the same.

Greenbelt will be properly maintained and new plantation

programmes will be undertaken frequently.

Continuous environmental awareness programmes will be carried

out for the employees and also in the surrounding villages.

6.5 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING

Ambient air quality will be monitored with respect to NOx, SO2,

Particulate Matter (PM10 and PM2.5) at least 3-5 locations in and around

the project site through a reputed environmental laboratory recognized

by MoEF&CC/NABL. Monitoring will be carried out for a period of 24

hours, every month. Emission from the D.G. sets is maintained &

monitored according to standard & used only in power failure condition.




6.6 WASTEWATER MONITORING

Monitoring of wastewater shall cover all the parameters specified by

GPCB, with special emphasis on pH, suspended solids, Dissolve Oxygen,

Oil and Grease, COD, BOD etc. and shall be carried out by a laboratory

accredited by MoEF&CC/NABL. Ground water monitoring locations will be

identified and periodically checked for the physical, chemical as well as

biological parameters as per drinking water standard IS:10500.

6.7 AMBIENT NOISE LEVEL MONITORING

Monitoring of the noise level is essential to assess the effectiveness of

Environmental Management Plan implemented to reduce noise levels. A

good quality sound level meter and noise exposure meter may be

procured for the same. Audiometric tests shall be conducted periodically

for the employees working close to the high noise sources.

The proposed environmental monitoring program during both

construction and operation phases are given in following table:

Table: 6.1 Environment Monitoring Plan

Sr.

No.

Component Location Parameters Frequency

Construction Phase

1 Ambient air

quality

At boundary of

construction site

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx,

CO

Once in a

month

2 Ground water

quality (used as

source of

domestic water)

Point of abstraction Parameters listed in

IS:10500

Once in a

month

3 Construction

Waste

Construction site Quantity/volume

generated and disposed

Once in a

day

4 Ambient Noise

Levels

Boundary of

Construction site

Ambient noise levels

(Leqday & Leqnight)

Once in a

month

5 Stack emission

Characteristics

Stacks attached to

emission sources

(including DG sets)

PM, SO2, NOx Once in a

month

Operational Phase

1 Ambient air

quality

3-5 stations in and

around project

covering upwind &

down-wind direction

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx,

CO

Once in a

month

2 Ground water

Quality

3 locations nearby

project site in

different directions

Parameters listed in

IS:10500

Once in 3

months

3 Effluent quality 2-3 samples pH, TDS, SS, COD,

BOD, Oil & Grease, etc.

Once in a

month

4 Ambient Noise Noise level

monitoring in dB(A)

near noise

Ambient noise levels

(Leq day & Leq night)

Once in a

month




generating

equipments

5 Greenbelt

development

Plant density,

health, growth and

survival rate at site

Plant density, health,

growth and survival rate

in additional greenbelt

development

Continuous

Greenbelt

management

6 Work zone

fugitive

monitoring

10-12 locations

where high

generation of

fugitive emission.

Dust Once in a

month

7 Health check-up

of workers

All workers --- As per the

statutory

guideline

**Budgetary provision for environment & safety management system has been made in

the project planning with Rs. 4000 Lakhs will be used for Environmental Management

System and Rs. 800 Lakhs as recurring cost per annum.

Rs. 15 Lakhs will be allocated for Environment Monitoring.




Chapter-7

Additional Studies A) RISK ASSESSMENT

7.1 INTRODUCTION

The risk assessment studies have been conducted for identification of

hazards, to calculate damage distances and to spell out risk mitigation

measures. M/s. Genext Steels Private Limited is a Greenfield project,

proposes establishment of mini integrated steel plant with captive power

plant at Survey Nos. 661, 662, 664, 665, 1822 & 1823, Village:

Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla, District: Ahmedabad, State: Gujarat. Unit

proposes production of Pellet plant (Pellets – 800 TPD) DRI Kilns (Sponge

Iron – 600 TPD), Steel Melting Shop (MS Billets – 1,000 TPD), Rolling Mill

(Structural Steel TMT Bars & Rolled products – 1,000 TPD), Power


and 5 MW through Fluidized bed combustion (FBC) Boiler].

Hazard analysis involves the identification and quantification of the

various hazards/unsafe conditions that exist in the plant. Risk analysis

follows an extensive hazard analysis, involving identification and

assessment of risks the neighbouring populations are exposed to as a

result of hazards present. Based on the risk estimation Disaster

Management Plan (DMP) has been prepared.

7.2 STUDY OBJECTIVE

The objectives of environmental risk assessment are following,

Identifying the potential hazardous areas so that adequate design

safety measures can be adopted to reduce the likelihood of accidental

events,

Identifying the stakeholders and evaluating their risk along with

proposing adequate control techniques,

Identifying the probable areas of environmental disaster which can be

prevented by proper design of the installations and its controlled

operation, and




Managing the emergency situation or a disastrous event, if any, during

the plant operation.

7.3 HAZARDOUS IDENTIFICATION

Hazard identification involves the process of collecting information on:

The types and quantities of hazardous substances stored and

handled,

The location of storage tanks & other facilities,

Potential hazards associated with the spillage and release of fuel.

The steel manufacturing industry is labor intensive and uses large scale

and potentially hazardous manufacturing processes. The industry

experiences accident rates that are high compared with some other

manufacturing industries. Some examples of such hazards likely to occur

in proposed Sponge Iron Plant, Induction Furnace, Continuous casting

machine, Rolling Mill, CPP unit are given below. These mainly impact on

those working within the industry, although health hazards can also

impact on local communities.

Fire

Explosion

Physical Hazards due EOT cranes, conveyor system, material handling

Fugitive Dust of Raw Material handling at charging bay, storage yard,

Crusher, DRI Kiln, billet crushers

Occupational health issue of Fly Ash, slag crushing dust, dolomite

exposure

Collapse of Structures/Fall of Material, stacking failure

Loading/Unloading /Packaging Operations failures

Electrocution/ Electrical Hazards

Accidental Spillage of hot molten metal & Diesel fuel

A preliminary hazard analysis here carried out is to identify the major

hazards associated. Finally, risk reducing measures are deduced and

implemented. The identification of hazards anticipation for the proposed

project activities are presented below.




7.3.1 Identification of source of Ignition

Creation of hotspots during operation & maintenance of Process

equipment

Self-ignition of hot materials

The electrical Discharge (thunderbolt, electrostatic charges, short

circuits), Static charge.

7.3.2 Identification of sources of Fire & Explosion

Oil and Lubricant Room (spillage)

Fine Coal Hoppers

Coal Storage area

Electrical Substations (Short circuit)

FBC Boilers

Induction Furnace

7.3.3 Thermal radiation

Enlists damage consequences due to different Heat Loads are given

below:

Table 7.1 List of Damages Envisaged at Various Heat Loads

Sr. No.

Heat loads

(kW/m²)

Type of Damage Intensity

Damage to Equipment Damage to People

1 37.5 Damage to process equipment 100% lethality in 1 min. 1%

2 25.0 Minimum energy required to

ignite wood

50% Lethality in 1 min.

Significant injury in 10 sec

3 19.0 Maximum thermal radiation intensity allowed on thermally unprotected equipment

--

4 12.5 Minimum energy required to

melt plastic tubing

1% lethality in 1 min

5 4.0 -- First degree burns, causes pain for exposure longer than 10 sec

6 1.6 -- Causes no discomfort on long

exposures

7.3.4 Physical Hazards onsite

Dust Exposure at coal handling area

Dust Exposure of Fly Ash, Bottom Ash

Dust Exposure of minerals, Slag (SMS)

Accident due to EOT crane, Conveyor system, Material handling

Slip/Trip/Fall due to improper stacking of material




7.3.5 Loading/Unloading operation/Storage

Approach of heavy good vehicles for unloading material

Work inside hopper/Silo for unblocking of mouth

Excessive Dust during Loading/unloading operation

Airborne dust

Conveyor moving parts

Cleaning of overflows

Unauthorized passages, travelling over transportation system

Motor overloading

Unclean platforms causing staggering and falls

7.3.6 Silo cleaning operation

Work in confined spaces

Falling of material

Falling of personal from working platform

Exposure to dust

Use of lifting equipment

7.3.7 Steel Melting Shop

The main hazards arise out of the use of hot metal and oxygen at the

spillage of hot metal cause serious burn injuries and fires. Severe

explosions are also caused due to hot metal falling over a pool of water,

resulting in injuries to persons, fire and damage to equipment due to

flying of hot splinters & splashing of liquid metal/slag. Sudden break out

of molten metal result in heavy explosions, due to their coming in contact

with water, thereby causing serious burn injuries to persons and damage

to equipment.

7.3.8 Electrical Hazard

Electrical equipment such as motors, circuit breakers, transformers, and

switchgear can produce sparks and ignite dust clouds and hybrid dust/air

mixtures in the vicinity.

Ingress of dust into enclosures with subsequent ignition causes

smoldering or burning (fires)

Dust that enters an enclosure will settle out as layers on internal

surfaces and become heated




Electrically conductive dusts causes short-circuiting when deposited

on exposed electrical components and circuits

Abrasive and/or corrosive dusts damages components of electrical

equipment

Electric shock

7.3.9 Dust and Gas

Dust is generated from handling and storage of raw materials. In the

melting process, high temperature operations are conducted; workers

may be exposed to gas inhalation hazards. Recommendations to prevent

exposure to gas and dust include the following:

Facility for ventilation to maximize air circulation. Outlet air shall be

filtered before discharge to the atmosphere;

Exhaust ventilation should be installed at the significant point sources

of dust and gas emissions;

Provide separate eating facility that allow for washing before eating;

Provide facilities that allow work clothes to be separated from

personal clothes, and for washing/showering after work;

Implement a policy for periodic health checks.

7.3.10 Captive Power plant (CPP Unit)

Steam Handling and Pressure drop (Steam Explosion)

Fly Ash handling

Exposure to High temperatures

Physical Hazards

Blast overpressure

Design failure

Failure of Safety Relief devices

Id fan/PA fan/SA fan failure

Circulation line failure

Turbine system failure

Furnace bed maintenance for FBC Boiler

Dosing System Failure (HP and LP)

Failure of fuel firing system/Burner Management system (BMS)

RCC chimney blockage




Temperature drop and failure of Air cooled condenser, Low pressure

(LP) and High Pressure (HP) heater and Drain cooler

Failure of re-circular system

Pump failure (Boiler feed, HSD unloading, Transfer)

7.3.11 Waste Heat Recovery Boiler (WHRB Unit)

Blast Over pressure

Steam Pressure drop

Leak , Catastrophic rupture in gas lines

Temperature drop in Boiler, Pre heater

Process failure

7.3.12 Respiratory Hazards

Damaged material should be repaired or removed while other materials

may be monitored and managed. Any handling of insulation materials

deemed to contain asbestos or any other hazardous material should only

be performed by properly trained and certified contractors and personnel

following internationally accepted procedures for their repair or removal;

Use of asbestos must be avoided in new installations or upgrades;

An LDPE sheet should be placed under the item to be insulated (e.g.

tube or vessel) and under the stock of insulation material to be

layered, to prevent surface contamination with fibers.

7.3.13 Noise

Raw and product material handling as well as the production processes

themselves may generate excessive noise levels.

7.3.14 Fire & Explosion Hazards

Handling of liquid metal may result in explosions causing melt run out,

and burns, especially if humidity is trapped in enclosed spaces. Other

hazards include fires caused by melted metal and the presence of liquid

fuel. Recommended techniques to prevent and control explosion and fire

hazards include the following:

Protect flammable gas, oxygen pipelines and combustible materials

during ‘hot work’ maintenance activities;

Design electrical equipment to prevent risk of fire in each plant area

(e.g. voltage/ampere design and degree of cable insulation;




protection of cables against hot liquid exposure; use of cable types

that minimize fire propagation)

7.3.15 Heat and Hot Liquid

High temperatures and direct radiation are common hazards in integrated

metallurgical plants. High temperatures can cause fatigue and

dehydration. Direct radiation also poses a risk to sight. Potential contact

with hot metal or hot water may occur from the cooling zone, from

splashes of melted metal, and from contact with hot surfaces.

Recommended measures for prevention and control of exposure to heat

and hot liquids/materials include the following:

Shield surfaces where close contact with hot equipment or

splashing from hot materials is expected;

Implement safety buffer zones to separate areas where hot

materials are handled or temporarily stored. Rail guards around

those areas should be provided, with interlocked gates to control

access to areas during operations;

Use appropriate PPEs (e.g. insulated gloves and shoes, goggles to

protect against radiation, and clothing to protect against heat

radiation and liquid metal splashes);

Install cooling ventilation to control extreme temperatures;

Implement work rotations providing regular work breaks, access to

a cool rest area, and drinking water.

7.3.16 Fire & Explosion Index

Fire and Explosion Index (FEI) is useful in identification of areas in which

the potential risk reaches a certain level. It estimates the global risk

associated with a process unit and classifies the units according to their

general level of risk. FEI covers aspects related to the intrinsic hazard of

materials, the quantities handled and operating conditions. This factor

gives index value for the area which could be affected by an accident, the

damage to property within the area and the working days lost due to

accidents. Fire and explosion index is then calculated as the product of

Material Factor (MF) and Unit Hazard Factor. Degree of hazards based on

F& EI given in the following Tables 7.2 and Table 7.3 respectively.




Table 7.2: Degree of Hazards Based on F& EI

FEI Range Degree of Hazard

0 – 60 Light

61 – 96 Moderate

97 – 127 Intermediate

128 - 158 Heavy

159 and Above Severe

Table 7.3: Calculated Degree of Hazards for Genext

S.

No.

Unit Parameter Hazard F&EI

Potential

Remarks

1 Raw

materials &

Products

Iron ore Light Physical Hazard

Coal Moderate Fire

Fly Ash, Bottom

Ash, Slag

Moderate Dust & Toxic

Other fluxing

minerals

Light Dust & Toxic

Product steel Light Physical Hazard

2 Iron making

In Rotary

kiln/Steel

making in

Induction

Furnace

Coal reduction

fuel gas

Intermediate Flammable and CO

pollution

Molten metal Intermediate Personnel injury & fire

Hot Metal Intermediate Personnel injury & fire

Burning coal Intermediate Personnel injury & fire

3 Rolling Mills Hot rolled metal Intermediate Personnel injury & fire

4 Fuel gas

Distribution

Gas leaks Intermediate Fire and CO pollution

5 Electric

power supply

Short circuit Intermediate Fire

6 Transformer Electrical Fire Light Explosion & fire

7 Steam

turbine

generator

building

Explosion Moderate Fires in Lube oil system, Short circuit

in control room/ switch gear, cable

galleries & oil drum storage

8 Boilers

explosion

Heat recovery

Boilers

Moderate Fire/steam

9 Coal Handling

plant

Storage shed Moderate Fire or dust explosion

10 Coal Storage Storage shed Moderate Spontaneous

Combustion

7.3.17 Heat Stress

Workers who are exposed to extreme heat or work in hot environments

may be at risk of heat stress. Exposure to extreme heat can result in




occupational illnesses and injuries. Heat stress can result in heat stroke,

heat exhaustion, heat cramps, or heat rashes. Heat can also increase the

risk of injuries in workers as it may result in sweaty palms, fogged-up

safety glasses, and dizziness. Burns may also occur as a result of

accidental contact with hot surfaces or steam. Prevention of heat stress in

workers is important. Employers should provide training to workers so

they understand what heat stress is, how it affects their health and

safety, and how it can be prevented.

Radiant heat flux

intensity, kW/m2

Effects on people

1.5 No harm; safe for the general public and for the

stationery personnel

2.5 Intensity tolerable for 5 min; severe pain above this

exposure time

3 Intensity tolerable for non-frequent emergency situations

for 30 min

5 Pain for 20 s exposure, first degree burn. Intensity

tolerable for those

performing emergency operations

6 Intensity tolerable for escaping emergency personnel

9.5 Second degree burn after 20 seconds

12.5-15 First degree burn after 10 seconds, 1% fatality in 1 min

25 Significant injury in 10 s, 100% fatality in 1 min

35-37.5 1% fatality in 10 s

7.4 MITIGATION MEASURES

Risk Mitigation measures for the proposed project activities require

adoption of best safety practice at the respective construction zones as

well as operational phase within the works boundary. In addition, the

design and engineering of the proposed facilities will take into

consideration of the proposed protection measures for air and water

environmental as outlined in earlier Chapter.

7.4.1 Coal Handling Plant

Coal handling unit shall be minimum 500 meters away from the

residential area, school/colleges, Historical Monuments, Religious

Places, Ecological sensitive area as well as forests area. Also from




Railway line, Express ways, National Highways, State ways and

District Roads and from water bodies like River, Nala, Canal, Pond etc.

Coal storage unit shall provide paved approach with adequate traffic

carrying capacity.

Compound wall with adequate height should be constructed around

the coal storage area

The unit should have adequate water supply through pipe/ surface

water before selection of the site.

Coal storage unit should ensure that stacking of coal in heaps does

not get higher than the compound wall of premises of unit

Adequate dust suppression measures should be provided to prevent

fugitive emission and also risk of fire. Similar measures should be

adopted for loading/unloading operations. Coal ash should be

transported in tankers, which are covered and closed and there is no

chance of spillage during transportation.

Firefighting measures should be provided to avoid any fire and ensure

that there is no explosive or chemical reaction in storage yard.

Coal unit should take measures to control the air pollution while

loading/handling coal. Specific measures should be under-taken to

avoid fugitive emission at the time of loading/unloading of coal by

individual coal yard unit.

7.4.2 Induction Furnace

Gas safety man would accompany the team and would test the

atmosphere for the presence of CO, before starting the work. If CO,

concentration is found exceeding the sage limit, the job would be

undertaken using necessary safety appliances viz., Oxygen Breathing

Apparatus/Blower type Gas mask.

Any gas cutting /welding job would be undertaken with the clearance

from Gas safety man.

7.4.3 Control Rooms

Control rooms shall be blast proof and shock proof

The building shall be located upwind of the process storage and

handling facilities.




Adequate number of doors shall be provided in the control room for

safe exit

Smoke detectors system shall be provided for control rooms at

suitable locations

One hydrant (minimum) for every 45m per wall of the building shall

be positioned all around the building

7.4.4 Gas Explosion, Prevention & Preventive Measure

The following actions would be taken to prevent any gas explosions in

case of gas leakage.

For works on gas lines/equipment, non-sparkling copper tools will

used. If such tools are not available, grease coated steel tools would

be used.

Electrical drill & other electrical equipment will not be used as these

can give rise to sparks.

The gas line would be thoroughly purged with steam before

undertaking the job on the same.

Naked lights will not be used near any de-pressurized gas main or

equipment unless the same has been thoroughly purged.

In case of profuse leakage of gas, action would be taken for water

sealing and isolating that portion.

The approach road to the gas line complex would be kept free from

any obstructions.

If gas catches fire due to some leakage, it will be extinguished with

plastic clay, steam or water.

The portion of gas main affected would be cooled down with water.

The valve will not be closed when fire is still there and the pressure in

the main will be maintained at minimum 100mm (WC).

Gas tapping points of flow or pressure measurement will be cleaned

with wooden stick or grease coated wire.

If lighting is necessary near gas line, portable spark, proof electrical

lamps of low voltage or explosion proof torchlight will be used for

enclosed areas.




7.4.5 Mitigation measure for Hot Metal spillage

Any accumulation of water will be prevented in such vulnerable areas.

In case of minor leakages, the flow of molten metal will be controlled.

If there is major breakout, the area would be cut off and cordoned.

Vital connections e.g. water, gas, compressed air, oxygen etc., would

be cut off or regulated as per requirement.

7.4.6 Electrical safety

Adequately rated and quick response circuit breakers, aided by

reliable and selective digital or microprocessor based electromagnetic

protective relays would be incorporated in the electrical system

design for the proposed activities.

The metering and instruments would be of proper accuracy class and

scale dimensions.

Fire Hydrant system

All the fire extinguisher system will be controlled by the Security

Department. Safety department will consist of qualified safety

manager, safety officer and supporting staff.

Portable fire extinguishers

Sprinkler system employed near fire prone areas

Fire Buckets

Table 7.4: Details of Fire Fighting Facilities onsite

Sr. No. Name of site Type of Extinguisher

1 Cable galleries CO2 & Foam type, Dry chemical powder

2 High voltage panel CO2 & Foam type, Dry chemical powder

3 Control rooms CO2 & Foam type, Dry chemical powder

4 MCC rooms CO2 & Foam type, Dry chemical powder

5 Pump Houses CO2 & Foam type, Dry chemical powder

6 Offices Dry chemical powder, foam type

7 Godowns Foam type

8 Bunkers, Silo,

enclosed dust

collector

CO2 type, N2 type, automatic sprinkler,

fixed spray nozzle (unless water reactive)




7.4.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

Personal Protective equipment kept onsite are made readily available to

plant personnel. Table 7.5 shows the lists of recommended Personal

Protective equipment (PPE) onsite.

Table 7.5: Summary of Recommended Personal Protective

Equipment According to Hazard

Description Workplace Hazards Suggested PPE

Eye and face

protection

Flying particles, molten

metal, gases or vapors,

light radiation

Safety glasses with side-

shields, protective shades,

etc.

Head protection

Falling objects, inadequate

height clearance, and

overhead power cords

Plastic helmets for top and

side impact protection

Hearing

protection

Noise Hearing protectors (ear plugs

or ear muffs)

Foot

protection

Failing or rolling objects,

points objects. Corrosive

or hot liquids

Safety shoes and boots for

protection against moving and

failing objects, liquids and

chemicals

Hand protection

Hazardous materials, cuts

or lacerations, vibrations,

extreme temperatures

Gloves made of rubber or

synthetic material

(Neoprene), leather, steel,

insulation materials, etc.

Respiratory

protection

Dust, fogs, fumes, mists,

gases, smokes, vapors

Facemasks with

appropriate filters for dust

removal and air

purification (chemical,

mists, vapors and gases).

Single or multi-gas

personal monitors, if

available

Oxygen deficiency Portable or supplied air (fixed

lines). Onsite rescue

equipment

Body/leg

protection

Extreme temperatures,

hazardous materials,

biological agents, cutting

and laceration

Insulating clothing, body

suits, aprons etc. of

appropriate materials

Fly Ash Fly ash handling and

storage

For handling, dust-proof

goggles and rubber or PVC

gloves.

For large quantities or

where heavy

contamination is likely,




wear: coveralls.

For high dust levels, wear:

a Full-face Class P3

(Particulate) or an Air-line

respirator.

For inhalation risk exists,

wear: a Class P1

(Particulate) respirator.

7.5 NATURAL CALAMITIES WHICH MAY LEAD TO EMERGENCY

7.5.1 Heat Stroke

Heat stroke is the most serious heat-related disorder. It occurs when the

body becomes unable to control its temperature: the body's temperature

rises rapidly, the sweating mechanism fails, and the body is unable to

cool down. When heat stroke occurs, the body temperature can rise to

106 0F or higher within 10 to 15 minutes. Heat stroke can cause death or

permanent disability if emergency treatment is not given. Measures

proposed for reduction of heat stress around furnace and for safe

handling of the hot metal considering the provision of Gujarat Factories

Rules.

Symptoms of heat stress

Symptoms of heat stroke include:

Hot, dry skin or profuse sweating

Hallucinations

Chills

Throbbing headache

High body temperature

Confusion/dizziness

Slurred speech

First Aid

Take the following steps to treat a worker with heat stroke:

Move the sick worker to a cool shaded area.

Cool the worker using methods such as:

Soaking their clothes with water.

Spraying, sponging, or showering them with water.

Fanning their body.




7.5.2 Earthquake

The project area falls under the seismic zone-III, which is the Low risk

earthquake. It may trigger into a technological disaster, includes collapse

of old structures, buildings leading to fire and explosion. Earthquake

cannot usually be forecasted and therefore precautions immediately prior

to such event are not usually possible.

Emergency recovery plan has been considered by the emergency

management team as per the situation and site conditions as follows in

Table 7.6:




Table 7.6

Emergency recovery plan

Step Activity Action By

Preparedness Constitute Emergency Response

Team

Identify ECC, if the identified ones

are damaged

Control centers to be equipped with

Alarming

Communication facilities

Emergency vehicles/equipment

List of emergency contacts &

suppliers

Medical facilities

Plant Key Person

Action during

effective

period

Do not panic. Raise alarm

Avoid standing near to windows,

external walls

Stand near the columns or duck

under sturdy furniture.

Assemble at emergency assembly

point as there may be aftershocks

Individual(s)

Action after

effective

Period

(Establish

Emergency

Control

Center. Site

Main

Controller to

direct

all activities)

Assess situation and initiate shut

down of plants (if required)

Initiate search & rescue (if required)

Evacuation of people.

Recovery/ Rehabilitation Work

Medical care for the injured.

Supply of food and drinking water.

Temporary shelters like tents, metal

sheds etc.

Repairing lines of communication and

information.

Restoring transport routes

Take head count

Activate emergency plan as situation

demands

Assess damage

Main Controller,

Incident

Controller, Site

Incident

Controller,

Coordinators –

Fire & Security,

Safety, Material

and Medical

7.5.3 Cyclone

The project area falls under low risk for Cyclone. The contingency actions

shall be based on the weather forecasts obtained from meteorological

stations and the local meteorological department. Some of the important

actions to be carried out are as follows:




Prior to Cyclone

Communication with the local meteorological department.

Maintain distances from storm in order to execute preparatory actions

in a shorter time.

Considering the consequences about the emergency might have on

operations and personnel.

Review all operations carefully to ensure that systems in jeopardy are

taken care of or shut down.

Ensure the readiness of first aiders, emergency vehicles, medical

centre, medicines etc.

Metallic sheets, loose materials, empty drums and other light objects

shall be properly secured.

Flush the drainage systems.




During Storm

Remain calm.

Avoid going outdoors.

Do not seal the office completely as the suction created by the

difference in atmospheric pressure inside and outside can rip open a

window or door by breaking window glass panes.

After the Storm

Do not touch electric lines.

Stay away from the disaster area.

Take special precautions in driving vehicles since the under-pavement

could cave in due to the weight of automobile.

7.5.4 Flood

The study area is at moderate risk for floods due to dam overflow. Flood

control measures will be taken as required maintaining the Plant safety.




7.6 GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS & OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH

Safety of plant personnel and equipment’s is of paramount importance

irrespective of plant size. Unit should bring its environment, health and

safety policy and follow it. Proper safety procedures are being followed as

far as possible including the use of personal protective gadgets (hand

gloves, dust masks, face shield, goggles, apron etc. as required) by the

workers while charging material manually (if required). A schedule has

been drawn up for regular preventive maintenance of each unit and the

same needs to be faithfully followed as far as possible. The unit's

management should ensure that all rotating machines and moving parts

are provided with appropriate guards and the guards are put back in the

position after checkup and maintenance. All the control systems are being

periodically checked for their reliability and accuracy. Ventilation has

been provided in process area where chances of buildup of concentration

of hazardous chemicals are high to prevent fire/toxic hazard. Electrical

grounding of all equipment is ensured. Genext Steel Pvt. Ltd. will adopt

suitable measures for the proper occupational health safety of workers

complying to OSHA standards. Permissible Exposure Level (PEL) of

various Chemical Handled onsite is listed below in Table 7.7.

Dust Exposure level of shop floor workers shall be appropriately

monitored.

Check of the effectiveness of preventive and control measures on

regular basis.

Adequate supplies of potable drinking water is to be provided .Water

supplied to areas of Plant food preparation or for the purpose of

personal hygiene (washing or bathing) are according to drinking water

quality standards.

Where there is potential for exposure to harmful dusts by ingestion

arrangements are to be made for clean eating areas, where workers

are not exposed to the hazardous or noxious substances.

Periodic medical hearing checks are to be performed on workers

exposed to high noise levels.




Provisions are to be made to provide OHS orientation training to all

new employees to ensure they are apprised of the basic site rules of

work at/on the site and of personal protection and preventing injury to

fellow employees.

Contractors that have the technical capability to manage the

occupational health and safety issues of their employees are to be

hired, extending the application of the hazard management activities

through formal procurement agreements.

Ambulances and first aid treatment facilities are made available for

any emergency situation.

Table 7.7: PEL level Summary as per OSHA

Sr.

No.

Chemical

Name

OSHA

PEL

Cal/OSHA

PEL

NIOSH REL ACGIH

mg/m3 8-hour TWA

(ST) STEL

(C) Ceiling

mg/m3

Up to 10-hour

TWA (ST)

STEL (C)

Ceiling mg/m3

TLV

1. Coal Dust 0.9 (resp.)

bituminous or

lignite; 0.4

(resp.)

anthracite

(coal dust to

be monitored

for crystalline

silica

a) Respirable

fraction less

than 5% SiO2

2.4 mg/m3) 0.9

(bituminous)

1

b) Respirable

fraction

greater

than 5% SiO2

10/(%SO2) 0.1

(bituminous)

2. Iron oxide 10 (fume) 5 (fume) 5 (dust and

fume)

5 mg/m3

3. Fly Ash

(calcium

oxide,

sillicates)

-- -- -- 1 mg/m,

natural

as

Wollastonite

(IHL, no

asbestos

and <1%

crystalline

silica

4. Carbon

Mono oxide

55 mg/m3 25 ppm

35 ppm 25 ppm

Reference- OSHA/PEL exposure limit Guide

Workers' health shall be evaluated by pre designed format, given below

for chest X rays, Audiometry, Spirometrv, Vision testing (Far & Near

vision. color vision and any other ocular defect) ECG, during pre-

placement and periodical examinations that will give the details of the

same.




Spirometry Tests

Year

Total

Manpower

FVC

(litres)

FEV 1 FEV 1/FVC

%

PEFR Conclusion

Physical Examination Tests

Year Total

Manpower Pulse ECG BP Right

Eye Left

Eye Color

Blindness Squint

Investigations Tests

Year Total

Manpower

Blood

(CBC)

Blood Sugar

(F& PP)

Lipid

profile

Urine

(R&M)

Conclusion

Audiometry Tests

Year

Total

Manpower

Audiometry

done

Normal Abnormal Conclusion

Annual report of health will be reviewed for Genext Steel Pvt. Ltd.,

manpower once the facility the proposed activity is operational as per

above given formats.

Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational health &

safety of all contract and casual workers.

Necessary required budgetary allocation will be kept for to ensure safety

of all Employees including contract & casual workers.

7.7 RISK REDUCTION MEASURES

For the risk reduction, the following salient suggestions and

recommendations are made:

On site and off site emergency response plan should be prepared and

circulated to concern persons.

Personnel at the proposed plant and public in surrounding area should

be made aware about the plant and risk associated with them.

A written process safety information document should be compiled for

general use.

The document compilation should include an assessment of the

hazards presented including (i) Physical data (ii) thermal data (iii)

process and mechanical design.




A system of checking testing/sealing of relief valves during major plant

overhauls should be instituted for plant equipment, wherever it is

applicable.

Predictive and preventive maintenance schedule should be prepared

for equipment, piping, etc. and thickness testing should be done

periodically as per standard practices.

Safe work practices should be developed to provide for the control of

hazards during operation and maintenance such as: (i) lockout /tag

out (ii) Confined space entry (iii) Opening process equipment or piping

(iv) Control over entrance into a facility by maintenance, contractor or

other support personnel.

Personnel engaged in handling of hazard activities should be trained to

respond in an unlikely event of emergencies.

The plant should check and ensure that all instruments provided in the

plant are in good condition, regular preventive maintenance must be

carried out and records of preventive maintenance should be

maintained.

Safety measures in the form of Do and Don’t Do should be displayed

at strategic locations especially in local language and English.

7.8 GENERAL WORKING CONDITIONS

(a) House Keeping

All the passages, floors and stairways should be maintained in good

condition. The system should be available to deal with any spillage of

dry or liquid chemical at the plant.

Walkways should be clearly marked and free from obstructions.

In the plant, precaution and instructions should be displayed at

strategic locations.

All pits, sumps should be properly covered or securely fenced.

Roads/walkway within the plant should be maintained neat and clean.

(b) Ventilation

Adequate ventilation should be provided in the work floor

environment.

The work environment should be assessed and monitored regularly.




Local ventilation is most effective method for controlling dust and

gaseous emissions at work floor.

7.8.1 Safe Operating Procedures

Safe operating procedures should be available for all operations

practices and equipment.

The workers should be informed of the consequences of failure to

observe the safe operating procedures.

7.8.2 Work Permit System

Work permit system should be followed at the plant. Hazardous work

permit should be used for hot work, electrical works, working in confined

space etc.

7.8.3 Personnel Protective Equipment (PPEs)

The required PPEs for each area/operation should be identified and the

necessary PPEs, like helmets, goggles, hand gloves, mask, safety

belts, ear muff and plug, etc. should be made available to the

personnel.

The workers should be trained for proper use of PPEs.

The system should establish and maintained for replacement of

damaged PPEs by testing and safety requirements.

Lockers should be provided to the workers for safe custody and

storage of PPEs.

7.8.4 Emergency Preparedness

On-site emergency plan should be prepared and readily available for

an unlikely event of emergency.

Emergency telephone numbers should be available and display

properly strategic locations.

7.8.5 Static Electricity

All equipment and storage tanks/containers of flammable materials

should be bounded and earthed.

Electrical resistance for earthing circuits should be maintained. Periodic

inspections should be done for earth pit and record should be

maintained.




7.8.6 Access

Adequate safe access should be provided to all places where workers

need to work and all such access should be in good condition.

7.8.7 Material Handling

Material handling areas should be clearly defined.

The workers should be made aware about the hazards associated with

manual material handling.

7.8.8 Communication System

Adequate communication facilities should be available at the plant and

supported with uninterrupted power supply.

Communication facilities should be checked periodically for its proper

functioning.

7.8.9 First Aid Facilities

First box should be provided at strategic locations within the plant.

At least one stature should be available in first aid room.

List of important telephone numbers should be displayed in first aid

room.

7.8.10 Accident Reporting, Investigation and Analysis

A system should be initiated for accident and near miss reporting,

investigation and analysis. To motivate and awareness among the

personnel at the plant about safety, total accident (lost time injury) free

days can be displayed on the board prominently at strategic location.

7.8.11 Safety Inspections

The system should be initiated for checklist based routine safety

inspection and internal audit of the plant periodically. Safety inspection

team should be formed from various disciplines and departments.

7.8.12 Safe Operating Procedures

Safe operating procedures should be formulated and updated, specific to

process & equipment and distributed to concerned plant personnel.

7.9 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN (DMP)

A comprehensive DMP that will be implemented in the industry as

presented below.




7.9.1 Objectives

To localize the emergency

To minimize the consequences

To ensure that following concepts are considered, namely rescue, first

aid, evacuation, rehabilitation, spreading the information.

7.9.2 Elements of On-Site Emergency Plan

Assess the size of event

Plan formulation and liaison

Actions like: Raise alarm, communication within and outside

Appoint key personnel and deploy. Appoint Controller.

Emergency Control Center

Action on site/Action off-site.

Alarm and visual signals at strategic points

7.9.3 Organization

Table 7.8 Organization Chart

Chief Controller of Disasters (Factory General Manager)

Team-1 Team-2 Team-3 Team-4 Team-5 Team-6

Area Coordinator

Medical Coordinator

Material Coordinator

Fire-Safety Coordinator

PR Coordinator

Security Coordinator

Plant

Manager

Chief

Chemist

Civil

Engineer

Power plant

Manager

HR

Manager

Security

Officer

7.9.4 Duty Allocation

1. Chief Disaster Controller (Chief Operating Officer)

• Take control and declare emergency

• Be there

• Contact Authorities

2. Area Co-Ordinator

• Take steps. Make emergency shut-down of activities. Put everything

in safe condition.

• Evacuate.

• Commence initial firefighting, till Fire Department comes to take up.

• Identify materials requirements and call Material Manager.

3. Medical Co-Ordinator

• Establish Emergency Center, Treat affected persons, Transfer/

Remove Patients




• Assign and Deploy staff

• Contact Authorities

4. Material Co-Ordinator

• Dispatch necessary supplies

• Arrange purchases

5. Fire & Safety Co-Ordinator

• Overall in-charge for Fire and Safety.

• Coordinate with area coordinator and direct the operations

• Coordinate with City and other fire-tenderers.

6. Security Co-Ordinator

• Remove crowd

• Arrange gate security

• Contact Police

• Arrange evacuation

• Contact outside Agencies if asked.

• Handle news media

• Mobilize vehicles

• Arrange food, clothing to Officers inside.

7. Emergency Control Center

• Adequate Internal phones

• Adequate external phones

• Workers tally

• Map showing hazardous storages, fire horns, safety equipments,

gates and side gates, assembly points, list of persons.

8. Action on Site

• Evacuate. Non-essential people first at assembly point

• Persons accounting & Record of next-of-kin

• Public relations

9. Post Disaster Analysis

• Why it happened?

• Whether on-site operations failed? In what respect?

• How to avoid such failure in future?

• Report to be submitted in detail to Authorities.




• Compensation arrangements if any, commenced?

• Call suggestions on shortfalls observed.

• Give rewards openly, pull defaulters individually.

7.10 INDUSTRIAL HAZARDS AND SAFETY

Maintenance of occupational safety and health is very closely related to

productivity and good employer-employee relationship. The plant will be

operated in compliance with all applicable safety and health laws and

regulations. For occupational safety following measures will be

incorporated in the proposed plant.

7.10.1 Hazard Identification

Safety Audit will be conducted by qualified technical personnel to study

the installation and activities of the industry and to suggest measures to

protect personnel and property against the risks. The areas of possible

hazardous incident are given for follow up action:

i. Fire in coal & coke storage yard, and diesel storage tanks.

ii. Electric Short circuit and consequent fire accident.

iii. Any likely sort of explosion in Boiler area

iv. Puncture in inside wall of induction furnace

v. Fall from high level structures

7.11 ON-SITE MANAGEMENT PLAN

The On-Site emergency plan will be circulated to all concerned members

of emergency teams. It is essential that all concerned familiarize

themselves with the overall on-site emergency plan and their respective

roles and responsibilities during and in emergency. They should also

participate regularly in the mock drills that will be conducted so as to

keep themselves and the emergency organization in a state of perpetual

preparedness at all times to meet any emergency.

7.11.1 Objectives, Scope and Contents of On-Site Emergency Plan

Objectives of emergency planning are to maximize the resource

utilization and combined efforts towards emergency operations and would

broadly cover the following.

To localize the emergency and if possible eliminate it.

To minimize the effects of accidents on people and property.




To take remedial measures in the quickest possible time to contain

the incident and control it with minimum damage.

To mobilize the internal resources and utilize them in the most

effective way.

To get help from the local community and government officials to

supplement internal manpower and resources.

To minimize the damage in other sections.

To keep the required emergency equipment in stock at right places

and ensure that they are in working condition.

To keep the concerned personnel fully trained in the use of

emergency equipment.

To give immediate warning to the surrounding localities in case of

an emergency situation arising.

To mobilize transport and medical treatment of the injured.

To educate the public in the surrounding villages regarding hazards.

To arrange for rescue and treatment of casualties.

To safe guard the people.

To identify the causalities and communicate to relatives.

To render necessary help to concerned.

To rehabilitate area affected.

To provide information to media & government agencies

7.11.2 Scope of Onsite Emergency Plan

The plan covers information regarding the properties of the Industry,

type of disasters and disaster/accident-prone zones, the actual disaster

control plans with authority delegation, controlling and other details.

General details like location, project layout, neighboring entities and the

assistance they can render etc., are also provided.

The important elements considered in this plan are;

Statutory requirements

Emergency organization

Roles and Responsibilities

Communications during emergency

Emergency shutdown & control of situation




Rescue & Rehabilitation

Emergency facilities

Important Information

The primary purpose of the on-site emergency plan or DMP is to control

and contain the incident and to prevent them from spreading. It is not

possible to cover every eventuality in the plan and the successful

handling of the emergency will depend on appropriate action and

decisions being taken on the spot. Other important aspects needing to be

considered include the following.

7.11.3 Emergency

A major emergency in any situation is one, which has the potential to

cause serious injury or loss of life, which may cause extensive damage to

the structures in the vicinity and environment and could result in serious

disruption to normal operation both inside and outside the industry

premises. Depending on the magnitude of the emergency, services of the

outside agencies may also be required for supplementing the internal

effort to effectively handle the emergency and to contain the damage.

The Management has to take effective steps to assess, minimize and

wherever feasible eliminate the risks to a large extent. Accidents may still

occur and it is necessary to be fully prepared to tackle all such

emergencies if and when they occur. It is likely that the consequences of

such emergencies will be confined to the units concerned or may affect

outside. If the consequences are confined within the plant boundary, it is

then termed as On Site Emergency and will be controlled by Chief

Emergency Controller.

In order to generate the plans it is necessary to first determine the kinds

of accidents leading to an emergency that can occur in the industry. The

most widely used technique in practice is based on experience

accumulated over many years and safety audits.

7.11.4 Methodology

The considerations in an emergency planning include the following:-

Identification and assessment of hazards and risks

Hazard, consequence analysis




Alarm and communication procedures

Identifying, appointment of personnel & assignment of responsibilities

Identification and equipping Emergency control centre, Identifying

Assembly, Rescue points, Medical facilities.

Emergency preparedness plan, procedures, steps to be taken before,

during and after emergency.

Formulation of plan and emergency sources.

Training rehearsal, evaluation and updating the plan.

7.11.5 Structure of Emergency Management

a. Noticing the accidents

b. Informing declarer of emergency

c. Declaration of emergency

d. Functions of declarer

e. Interaction with outside agencies

f. Emergency action plan & chart

g. Emergency action plan

h. In case of major emergency, the steps to be taken immediately by

various agencies are all follows.

Sr.

No.

Step to be taken Agency

1 Noticing of emergency situation Operator/Supervisor

2 Assessment of Situation Section head

3 Information to emergency Declarer HOD

4 Plant siren for declaring emergency

depending on situation

Emergency Declarer

5 Shutdown of equipments /Plant Shop Head

6 Assessment of impact and organizing

control measure

Incident/Site

Controller

7 Proper function of control rooms Emergency controller

8 Co-ordination with outside agencies GM – HR

9 Control measures at site

(Rescue, evacuation, Fire Fighting etc.)

Incident Controller

10 Seeking help from outside, nearby

factories

Incident controller &

safety Head

11 All clear Signal (After controlling

emergency situation)

Emergency Declarer




7.11.6 Infrastructure at Emergency Control Centre

Emergency control centers should therefore contain the following:

An adequate number of external telephones; if possible, one should

accept only outgoing calls, in order to bypass jammed switchboards

during an emergency.

An adequate number of internal telephones

Radio equipment

A plan of the works, to show:

Areas where there are large inventories of hazardous materials.

Sources of safety and first aid equipment.

The fire-Fighting system and additional sources of water.

Site entrance and roadways, including up-to-date information on

road Traffic.

Assembly points.

Vehicle parking and rail sidings.

Additional work and layout plans detailing alternate routes and

affected areas, during an emergency.

Note pads, pens and pencils.

A list of key personnel, with addresses, telephone numbers, etc.

The emergency control center should be sited in an area of minimum risk.

Suitable location from where clear view of the plant is possible or the

control room can be designated as Emergency Control Center. All the Site

Controller/ Incident Controller Officers, Senior Personnel would be located

here or have access to the ECC.

7.11.7 Assembly Point

In an emergency, it will certainly be necessary to evacuate personnel

from affected areas and as precautionary measure, to further evacuate

non-essential workers, in the first instance, from areas likely to be

affected, should the emergency escalate. The evacuation will be effected

on getting necessary message from i.e. on evacuation; employees would

be directed to a predetermined safe place called Assembly Point.

Proposed Location: Area opposite to service building will be the Assembly

Point where all non-key personnel would assemble on getting direction




over Public-Address System. Outdoor assembly points, predetermined

and pre-marked, will also be provided to accommodate evacuees from

affected plant area(s). Roll call of personnel collected at these assembly

points, indoor and outdoor will be carried out by roll call crew of safety

team to account for any missing person(s) and to initiate search and

rescue operations if necessary.

7.11.8 Emergency Management Training

The Key Personnel would undergo special courses on disaster

management. This may preferably be in-plant training. The Managers,

Senior Officers and Staff would undergo a course on the use of

personal protective equipment.

The Key Personnel belonging to various Teams would undergo special

courses as per their expected nature of work at the time of

emergency.

The plant management should conduct special courses to outside

agencies like district fire services to make them familiar with the plant

layout and other aspects, which will be helpful to them during an

emergency.

7.11.9 Mock Drills

It is imperative that the procedures laid in this Plan are put to the test by

conducting Mock Drills. To avoid any lethality, the emergency response

time would be clocked below 2 minutes during the mock drill.

1st Step: Test the effectiveness of communication system

2nd Step: Test the speed of mobilization of the plant emergency teams

3rd Step: Test the effectiveness of search, rescue and treatment of

casualties

4th Step: Test emergency isolation and shut down and remedial

measures taken on the system

5th Step: Conduct a full rehearsal of all the actions to be taken during

an emergency.

The Disaster Management Plan would be periodically revised based on

experiences gained from the mock drills.




7.11.10 Proposed Communication System

The instrument and control system will take care of the following

operating philosophy of the plant-

The project will be provided with a control system located in a central

control room.

The shift engineer will operate the plant from his console panel.

All operations will be represented in a graphic panel on the console

and every operation will be depicted as operating sequences.

All operating parameters will be displayed in digital format.

Alarms will be provided for all parameters, when they exceed set

values.

High-High/Low-Low alarms and trip functions will be provided to trip

Pumps/compressors to bring the entire system to a safe shutdown.

Alarm signal code is set for process description

7.11.11 Emergency Medical Facilities

Stretchers, gas masks and general first aid materials for dealing with

chemical burns, fire burns, etc., would be maintained in the medical

center as well as in the Emergency Control Room. A range of medicines

should be maintained in the ECC/Medical Center. Breathing apparatus

and other emergency medical equipment should be provided and

maintained. The Medical Center should display poster for treating burns

and first aid. The qualified doctors of the medical center should use their

professional judgment for medical treatment.

7.12 OFF SITE EMERGENCY PLAN

Objective

If the effects of the accident or disaster inside the plant are felt outside of

its premises, it calls for an off-site emergency plan, which should be

prepared and documented in advance in consultation with the District

Authorities.

Key Personnel

The ultimate responsibility for the management of the off-site

emergencies rests on the Collector/District Magistrate/ Deputy

Commissioner. He will be assisted by representatives from all concerned




organizations, departments and services at the District level. This core

group of officers would be called the District Crisis Management Group

(CMG). The members of the group will include:

1) Collector/District Magistrate Deputy Commissioner

2) Commissioner of Police

3) Municipal Commissioner, if municipalities are involved

4) Deputy Director, Health

5) Pollution Control Board Representative

An Operation Response Group (ORG) will then be constituted to

implement the directives of the CMG. The various government

departments, some or all of which will be concerned, depending on the

nature of the emergency, could include:

Police Animal Husbandry

Health & Family Welfare Agriculture

Medical Civil Defense

Revenue PWD

Fire Service Civil Supplies

Transport Panchayats

Electricity

The SC and IC, of the on-site emergency team, will also be responsible

for communications with the CMG during the off-site emergency.

Education to Public

People living within the influence zone should be educated on the

emergency in a suitable manner. This can be achieved only through the

Local and District Authorities. However, the Project Authority can extend

necessary information to the Authorities.

In the aftermath, factory inspectors may wish to ensure that the affected

areas are rehabilitated safely. In addition, they may require items of

plant and equipment essential for any subsequent investigation to be

impounded for expert analysis, and may also want to interview witness as

soon as practicable.

In the state of Gujarat, District Emergency Control (Contingent) plans

have been formulated, and some rehearsed, for some districts and the




copies are available from the local factory inspectorate. All hazardous

factories needing on-site and off-site emergency plans are advised to

keep constant liaison with them.

The communication system between the factory and various above role-

playing authorities must be effective. Ineffective public telephone system

will not be useful in emergencies. Therefore, it should be improved and

other effective system like duplex (two way) radio telephone, wireless

set, hot line, emergency lead vehicles, etc., should be maintained

between important organizations.




(B) Social Impact Assessment

Total land 37.82 Acre is purchased from the owners on a mutually agreed

price. There will be no Rehabilitation & Resettlement (R&R) involved as

there is no habitation or livestock in the acquired land. However,

preference will be given to local people for employment.

Detailed Social Impact Assessment (SIA) study is given below:

Introduction

Corporate Environmental Responsibility (CER) refers to a company’s

duties to withdraw from damaging natural environments. The term

derives from Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR). Also can be referred

as corporate initiative to assess and take responsibility for the company's

effects on the environment and impact on social welfare. The term

generally applies to companies efforts that go beyond what may be

required by regulators or environmental protection groups.

Moreover, while proposing the Corporate Social Responsibility Rules

under Section 135 of the Companies Act, 2013, the Chairman of the CSR

Committee mentioned the Guiding Principle as follows: "CSR is the

process by which an organization thinks about and evolves its

relationships with stakeholders for the common good, and demonstrates

its commitment in this regard by adoption of appropriate business

processes and strategies. Thus CSR is not charity or mere donations. CSR

is a way of conducting business, by which corporate entities visibly

contribute to the social good. Socially responsible companies do not limit

themselves to using resources to engage in activities that increase only

their profits. They use CSR to integrate economic, environmental and

social objectives with the company's operations and growth." CSR is not

charity or mere donations. CSR is a way of conducting business, by which

corporate entities visibly contribute to the social good. Socially

responsible companies do not limit themselves to using resources to

engage in activities that increase only their profits. They use CSR to

integrate economic, environmental and social objectives with the

company's operations and growth.




Corporate Social Responsibility is not a new concept in India, however,

the Ministry of Corporate Affairs, Government of India has recently

notified the Section 135 of the Companies Act, 2013 along with

Companies (Corporate Social Responsibility Policy) Rules, 2014

"hereinafter CSR Rules" and other notifications related thereto which

makes it mandatory (with effect from 1st April, 2014) for certain

companies who fulfill the criteria as mentioned under Sub Section 1 of

Section 135 to comply with the provisions relevant to Corporate Social

Responsibility.

CSR is generally understood as being the way through which a company

achieves a balance of economic, environmental and social imperatives

("Triple-Bottom-Line- Approach"), while at the same time addressing the

expectations of shareholders and stakeholders. The term "Corporate

Social Responsibility (CSR)" can be referred as corporate initiative to

assess and take responsibility for the company's effects on the

environment and impact on social welfare. The term generally applies to

companies efforts that go beyond what may be required by regulators or

environmental protection groups.

Purpose of the CER/CSR

Corporate social responsibility (CSR) is a broad term used to describe a

company's efforts to improve society in some way. These efforts can

range from donating money to non-profits to implementing

environmentally-friendly policies in the workplace. The group's CSR

activities are rooted in the knowledge that businesses have a duty to

enable all living beings to get a fair share of the planet's resources.

Businesses are powerful constituents of society and the most successful,

respected, and desirable businesses exist to do much more than make

money; they exist to use the power of business to solve social and

environmental problems. Genext will involve in a community

development and environment preservation projects. Social activities

relate to health, primary education, skills training and entrepreneurship,

livelihoods and women empowerment.




Objective of study

The main objectives are as follows:

1. To assess the impact of the project on agricultural situation;

2. To examine the impact of the project on pattern of demand;

3. To assess the in impact of the project on consumption pattern;

4. To examine employment and income effects of the project;

5. To explore the possibility of local industrialization as an offshoot of the

Project;

6. To examine the effect of the project on education status of the people

in the study area; and

7. To judge peoples' perception regarding the project

Survey Methodology

The survey aims to document the living conditions, level of socio-

economic development of the region and the socio-economic profile of

people in the core and buffer zones of the study area. The survey was

organized to collect information on socio-economic variables at the village

level as well as household level. The village level data are collected from

revenue offices, Panchayat office; Censuses while the household level

data are collected through questionnaire method. The agreed

methodology has been followed with the tools of SIA. The following

strategies were adopted for undertaking the study.

Consultation with Representatives of focus area

Close coordination was maintained with concerned Public Representative’s

Offices, Local representatives and common village people. Assessment of

the area was made by industry representative along with Team of M/s

San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd.

Assessment of studied area

Pre-contract field visit was conducted with assessment of the area and

people interacting with concerned employees and few opinion leaders of

the area. This visit facilitated the strategic plan to complete the study in

stipulated time.




Focus Group Discussion

A guiding principle was developed to conduct focused group discussion

with different categories of people of the studied villages.

Study of Village Profile

This study includes village level survey of Population, Economics, Land

use Pattern, Employment pattern, Healthcare Facilities, Amenities for

Livelihood. This primary data is statistically validated and the statistical

differences and is interpreted in the light of economic impacts.

Sources of Information

As per the scope of present study, the information on the sociological

aspects like demography, human settlements, social aspects like SC & ST

population, literacy levels and economic aspects like occupational

structure of workers has been gathered and complied from secondary

sources viz. the District Census Statistical Handbook, 2011 for

Ahmedabad district as these documents being comprehensive and

authentic. Land use pattern and infrastructure, demographic and socio-

economic environment, and living standard and infrastructure as per the

census record of 2011 are provided in Section 3.15 of Chapter 3.

Socio Economic Survey within study area:

1) Educational facility

Literacy is an important indicator for understanding the socio-economic

development of any area. Many villages of the study area have no proper

education facility and literacy rate is very low especially women.

According to the Gujarat State Census Statistical Handbook, 2011, the

male literacy in the study area is found to be 66% and the female literacy

in the study area is found to be 44%. The difference in literacy rate

between male and female is found be much wider. The overall study

indicates that the literacy rate in female population is alarmingly low

which can be attributed to the social structure prevailing in the villages

and traditional family trends. The educational facilities in the study area

are good due to the presence of good infrastructure for basic education

like primary schools and high schools for higher education.




As per 2011 census, there are 14 primary schools, 4 Secondary schools,

2 senior secondary school in all 13 villages within 10 km radius. As per

field survey, there are 18 Primary Schools, 12 Secondary Schools, 3 High

School within 10 km radius of the area. However, there is a lack of ITI

within this area keeping in view of the industrialization around these

villages and need of semi-skilled and skilled labor for the industrial units.

Area is an industrial zone and skilled manpower is essential. Unit will

contribute to start vocational training or join hands with other industrial

group ITI institutes.

2) Health & Family welfare

As per 2011 census, 13 villages in the study area have 1 Primary Health

Centre, 4 Primary Health Sub Centre, 1 Veterinary hospital, 1 Family

Welfare Centre in study area of 10 km. As per field survey, there are 1

primary health center, 3 sub-centers, and 10 private medical

practitioners. Primary Health Centre is located at village Shiyal. There is

no any Employees' State Insurance (ESI) Hospital within the study area.

Based on above study, it is concluded that heath and family welfare

facility found poor in the study area. Unit will arrange 2-3 health checkup

camp during monsoon and provide free medicines.

3) Drinking water and Sanitation Facilities

As per 2011 census, all the villages in the study area have mainly tap

water supply as a source of drinking water. In addition to this, some of

the villages have facility of Tube well water supply, Hand Pump water

facility, Well water facility, tank water facility, 3 villages have River/canal.

As per field survey, there is lack of drinking water facilities in the study

areas. Many part of study area has saline water from ground source for

drinking purpose. Unit proposed to provide RO system for drinking water

in Bagodara, Gundanapara & Mithapur village or any village suggested by

local authority. Unit will contribute fund towards storage of drinking water

facility at selected villages.

It is observed that the basic amenities of separate toilet for boys and

girls; and drinking water are available in all primary schools across all

villages in the study area. But in backward areas people do not have the




toilet facility available at their homes. So they have been left with no

other option except to defecate in open. Few household had got toilet

constructed under the Government Scheme but they were not in working

condition because of absence in regular supply of water or not being fully

constructed. There are inadequate drainage facilities. As a result,

Dengue, Malaria and Gastro problems are prevalent in this area. Unit will

contribute fund towards the improvement.

4) Women Empowerment activities

In some cases, women bear larger losses in terms of educational

attainment, employment and wages. In terms of employment, which is a

major determinant of livelihood, Ahmedabad rural talukas shows lower

than state average in Worker Participation Rates (WPR). There is distinct

Gender disparity in WPR across all talukas, with women substantially

under-represented in main workers category.

As per 2011 census, 69.84% of female population are non-workers.

49.08% of male population is part of main worker, while only 10.64% of

female population is a part of main workers. 5.55% of male workers are

marginal workers, while 19.52% of female workers are engaged in such

type of activities. Thus, unit proposes to provide education and training to

engage more women in employment opportunities.

5) Preservation of Environment and Sustainable Development

For Preservation of Environment, unit will develop greenbelt/plantation

programme in surrounding villages. Unit will promote uses of non-

conventional source of energy i.e. solar power. Unit will contribute to

develop natural composting pits which benefits to reduce municipal solid

waste and generate organic manure; which is utilize for agriculture

activity.

Need Analysis of the Target Beneficiaries in the Project Area

Various needs were identified during the baseline survey within the study

area. Major problems they are facing are given below.

Poor availability of water for irrigation and drinking purpose

Lack of good medical facilities

Unemployment




Health and sanitation program

Poor educational facilities

In the assessment of socio-economic conditions, few indicators were

identified for further attention and strategic planning as given below:

Target Project Area

Total 13 villages fall within the study area; Out of which unit will give

priorities to Bagodara, Gundanapara & Mithapur villages for CER activities

according to the below mentioned criteria. It may vary based on the

outcome of the public demand during the public hearing.

Largely affected by industrial growth

Vicinity to the project site

Sourcing of employees from these areas

Low level socio-economic status of the people

Lack of adequate intervention of voluntary organization in the area

The focus area of comprehensive program includes: health, education,

sanitation, sustainable livelihood & infrastructure development.

Details of expenditure for CER activities:

Estimated cost of the project : Rs. 261.0 Crores

Expenditure earmarked towards CER : Rs. 5.22 Crores

(2% of the project cost)

The detailed expenditure break-up of above activities for the five years

are given below:

Table 7.9 Detailed expenditure for CER activities

Sr.

No.

Activities Years (Rs. in Crore) Total Budget

(Rs. in Crore) 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th

1 Educational facilities & trade training

to educated unemployed 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 1

2 Health and Family Welfare facilities 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 1.5

3 Drinking water and sanitation facilities 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 1.3

4 Women Empowerment activities 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.9

5 Preservation of Environment and

Sustainable Development-Maintaining

village ponds, encouraging rain water

harvesting in village

0.12 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.52

Total 1.06 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 5.22

Grand Total 5.22




Implementation of such program will be ensured by constituting a

Committee comprising of the

i. Project proponent

ii. Representatives of village Panchayat

iii. Representative of the District Administration

Action taken report in this regard will be submitted to the Ministry’s

Regional Office.

(C) PUBLIC CONSULTATION

The public hearing was conducted by GPCB on 03.11.2018 on the basis of

the draft EIA/EMP incorporating the Terms of References. Point raised

during the public hearing by participants is summarized below with

reply/action taken by project proponent.

Table 7.10 Points raised during public hearing

Statement of issues raised by the public and response of the project proponent with action

plan is as follows.

Sr.

No.

Name and

Address

Point Represented Reply from Project

Proponent

Time Bound

Action Plan

proposed

Budgetary

provision

1 Shri Kanubhai

M. Makwana,

Local leader &

Director APMC,

Bavla

Village:

Bagodara

He informed that,

earlier it was seems

that there will be air

pollution, there will

be water pollution

and wastewater from

the industry would

be discharged into

River Bhogavo but as

per the clarification

given today, industry

will neither discharge

wastewater outside

nor in into

underground.

Therefore, we all

welcome this

industry. Care

should be taken that

there should be no

difficulty to us due to

operation of this

industry.

Employment shall be

given to local people

and further informed

that condition of

surrounding villages

is poor, hence

employment shall be

Representative of

project proponent

has assured that,

care will be taken

for no creation of

pollution. APCM

like ESP and bag

filters will be

installed and

efficiently

operated and

GPCB & CPCB

norms will be

maintained and

assured that in

the event of

non-functioning

of EMS, the

plant will be

taken under

shut down.

--




given to them and

care must be taken

for no creation of

pollution and

promises given

today must be

implemented and we

welcome this

industry. 2 Shri

Rameshbhai J.

Makwana,

Local leader &

Vice chairman

APMC, Bavla

Village:

Bagodara

He informed that it is

my opinion that

surrounding area will

get employment due to

upcoming of this

industry. It is to be

assured that there wills

no problem of

pollution.

He suggested that

employment shall be

given to the local

people and their health

shall be maintained,

then we have no

objection for upcoming

industry.

Company technical

representative has

replied that as

shown in their

presentation,

employment will be

given to the local

people, training

center shall also be

established and man

force will be created

by giving required

training.

He further informed

that, they will take

suggestion from

Sarpanch of

surrounding villages

for CSR activities

and budget will be

allotted for the

required activities of

the villages.

CSR activities

will be started

immediately

after start the

project

implementation

work.

Rs. 5.22

Crore

budget for

the CSR

activities

for

upcoming

five years




Chapter-8

Project Benefits

8.1 INTRODUCTION

Project benefit focus on those points which will become beneficial to the

surrounding area or community in terms of infrastructural development,

social development, employment and other tangible benefits due to

project.

8.2 IMPROVEMENT IN PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE

Proposed project of Genext Steels Private Limited will have

requirement of an infrastructure for its own use the benefits of which will

be available to the general public as well, so direct benefits of

infrastructure development is anticipated. Thus, the project will have

considerable indirect benefits to the physical infrastructures.

8.3 IMPROVEMENT IN SOCIAL INFRASTRUCTURE

With the implementation of the proposed plant, the socio-economic status

of the local people will improve substantially. The project proposes to

employ local people which will help to increase the income of local people

& improve their standard of living. The construction and commissioning

phase will require a substantial manpower and resources. Hence, with the

growth in the economic conditions, the project may lead to growth in the

social stature & improve of the quality of life in the surrounding area.

Social infrastructure will improve by means of civilization, vocational

training and basic amenities.

Civilization: Due to the project, employment and other infrastructural

facilities will boost up income of surrounding people and improve quality

of life. This will indirectly boost up the civilization of the surrounding

people.

Vocational Training: Unit will provide vocational training opportunity to

the surrounding people and motivate the education activities that will

lead to the change in life style of the surrounding, hence, improving

social infrastructure.




Basic Amenities: Unit will consider providing or improving education

facilities, healthcare, and drinking water facilities in the area, which will

help in uplifting the living standards of local communities.

8.4 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL

The proposed plant creates employment for 150-200 people during

construction phase and 500-700 people during operation phase of the

project. Temporary and permanent employment will be generated during

construction phase. Unit will give first priority to local workers for the

semi-skilled and un-skilled jobs. Further, the indirect employment via

increased transportation, ancillary units & local economic activities will

also add in the employment potential of the project. Thus, the unit will

result in considerable benefits in terms of employment.

8.5 SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES PROPOSED

Genext Steels will actively contribute to improve the Socio-economic

conditions of the area by providing assistance for local persons preferable

from the nearby villages.

Detailed expenditure for CER activities

Sr.

No.

Activities Years (Rs. in Crores) Total

Budget (Rs.

in Crore) 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th

1. Educational facilities & trade

training to educated unemployed

0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 1.0

2. Health and Family Welfare facilities 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 1.5

3. Drinking water and sanitation

facilities

0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 1.3

4. Women Empowerment activities 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.9

5. Preservation of Environment and

Sustainable Development-

Maintaining village ponds,

encouraging rain water harvesting

in village

0.12 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.52

Total 1.06 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 5.22

Grand Total 5.22

8.5.1 How to utilize Corporate Environment Responsibility Funds

Distinct CER projects shall be prepared on the local conditions/public

hearing issues. A major have been defined above but more can be

included as would be decided by the Panchayats, GPCB, Project

Proponent, in consultation with the Administration.




Project estimate will be prepared based on PWD schedule rates for

each distinct Item and schedule for time-bound action plan will be

prepared.

These CER projects as indicated by the project proponent shall be

implemented simultaneously along with the main project.

Implementation of such program shall be ensured by constituting a

Committee comprising of the-

i. Project proponent

ii. Representatives of village Panchayat

iii. Representative of the District Administration

Action taken report in this regard shall be submitted to the Ministry’s

Regional Office.

No free distribution/donations and or free camps shall be included as a

part of the above CER budget.

8.6 OTHER TANGIBLE BENEFITS

As mentioned above, the project will have many employment & trade

opportunities, which will eventually result in appreciable economic

benefits to the local people & businesses/contractors. Indirectly, the

project will help the Government by paying different taxes from time to

time, which is a part of revenue and thus, will help in developing the

area.

The project will ensure the most useful products available in the market

which wherever would be used will have its own positive benefits all

around. The project will make use of many raw materials like iron ore,

coal, bentonite, dolomite, consumables and also procure a large number

of equipment of large value from the industry from all over India,

everywhere it will have positive impact like those mentioned above in

series.




Chapter-9

Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis

As per EIA Notification 2006, this Chapter of the ‘Environmental Cost Benefit

Analysis’ is applicable only if it is recommended at the Scoping stage. As per

the ToR issued by MoEF&CC, New Delhi vide F. No. IA-J-11011/501/2017-

IA-II(I), dated 19th June, 2018, the Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis is

not applicable and hence has not been prepared.




Chapter-10


10.1 INTRODUCTION

Assessment of environmental and social impacts arising due to

implementation of the project activities is the technical heart of EIA

process. An equally essential element of this process is to develop

measures to eliminate, offset or reduce impacts to acceptable levels

during implementation and operation of projects. The integration of such

measures into project implementation and operation is supported by

clearly defining the environmental requirements within an Environment

Management Plan (EMP).

Environmental Management includes protection/mitigation/enhancement

measures as well as suggesting post project monitoring programme.

The EMP of Genext Steels Private Limited (Henceforth Genext) has

been formulated considering all necessary mitigation measures to

prevent/minimize/eliminate environmental impacts associated with the

proposed activities. Genext will develop an Environment Management

Cell to keep a close watch on the performance of the pollution control

equipments, emissions from the sources and the quality of surrounding

environment in accordance with the monitoring program.

OBJECTIVE OF ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN

The EMP is prepared with the main objective of enlisting all the

requirements to ensure effective mitigation of adverse impacts for all the

components of the proposed project. The key objectives of the

Environment Management Plan are,

To limit/reduce the degree, extent, magnitude or duration of adverse

impacts,

To treat all the pollutants i.e. liquid effluent, air emissions and

hazardous waste with adoption of adequate and efficient technology,

To reduce risk/hazards and design the disaster management plan,

To enhance improvement of environment performance,




To make budgetary provision and allocation of funds for environment

management system and for timely revision of budgetary provisions.

10.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE

Construction phase results in temporary environmental pollution except

for the permanent change in local land use pattern & aesthetics in certain

cases. Such pollution is mainly due to site preparation, civil works,

transportation, storage & handling of construction materials, sanitation of

construction workers etc. These are usually short-term impacts. The

project proponent will take appropriate steps to control pollution during

construction phase.

10.2.1 Air and Noise Environment

During construction work, air pollution is expected in the form of

increased suspended particulate matter concentration. Installation work

will generate noise and dust, but it will be within working areas. Vehicular

movement in the premises will also generate dust.

To mitigate the impact, following measures will be taken:

Regular sprinkling of the water will be done and the roads will be

periodically leveled with bulldozers to keep roads ditch free.

Regular preventing maintenance of machinery and transportation

vehicles will be carried out.

Provision of silencer to noise generating machines, if required, and

Noise protection devices such as earmuffs/earplugs will be provided to

workers working in noisy area.

10.2.2 Water supply & sanitation

During construction phase, water will be provided to workers for their

requirement & for construction activity. Water supply will be met from

ground water source and/or through tankers. Portable sanitation facilities

will be provided to maintain proper standards of hygiene. These facilities

would preferably be connected to a septic tank and shall be maintained

properly to have least environmental impact.

10.2.3 Waste

The solid waste shall be collected and disposed off as per the norms.




10.2.4 Socio-Economic Environment

The proposed manpower requirement during construction will be 150-200

nos. Unit gives preference to local people through both direct and indirect

employment.

10.2.5 Health and Safety

Adequate rest area will be provided to the construction workers, casual

workers, and truck drivers. Unit will also supply potable water and

portable sanitation facilities for all the workers. The safety department

will supervise the safe working of the contractor and their employees.

Work spots will be maintained clean, provided with optimum lighting and

enough ventilation to eliminate dust/fumes. Vertical deep excavation

work will not be carried out but will be done with a proper slant to avoid

any causality due to the excavations yielding or sagging.

10.3 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT DURING THE OPERATIONAL

PHASE

EMP proposed for implementation is detailed under the following heads:

Air Pollution Management

Wastewater Management

Solid & Hazardous Waste Management

Noise Control

Greenbelt Development

Occupational Safety and Health

Implementation of EMP and monitoring programme

10.3.1 Air Pollution Control

10.3.1.1 Source of Air Pollution and Control Measures

The following pollution control systems are proposed in steel plant.

Sr.

No.

Source Air pollution control

equipment

Probable

pollutants

1. Pellet

plant

Bag filter PM <50 mg/NM3

SO2 <100 ppm

NOX <50 ppm

2. DRI Kiln Electro Static Precipitators (ESP) PM <50 mg/NM3

3. SMS

plant

Fume Extraction system with bag

filters

PM <50 mg/NM3

4. Power

plant

Electro Static Precipitator (ESP) PM <30 mg/NM3




Apart from the above, fume extraction system with bag filters, dust

suppression system; covered conveyers etc. will also be installed.

The flue gases from the Pellet plant will be controlled by Bag Filters and

then discharged into the atmosphere through stack of 31.0 m height.

Flue gases from Rotary kiln of DRI plant will be passed through Electro

Static Precipitators (ESPs) and then discharged into the atmosphere

through stack of 48.0 m height.

Flue gases from DRI plant will be passed through Waste Heat Recovery

Boiler and after heat recovery; the gases will be treated in High efficiency

ESPs to bring down the particulate emission in the exhaust gases to

below 30 mg/Nm3 and then discharged into the atmosphere through

stack of 75.0 m height.

The fugitive emissions from the Induction furnaces will be sucked through

adequately designed suction hoods and will pass through a fume

extraction system with bag filters and then the treated gases will be

discharged into the atmosphere through 4 nos. of stacks each of 30.0 m

height for effective dispersion of emissions from Induction Furnaces. The

outlet dust emission in the exhaust gases will be less than 50 mg/Nm3.

The dust will be pneumatically carried to covered bins. The flue gases

from the FBC boiler will be treated in a high efficiency ESP to bring down

the particulate emission to less than 30 mg/Nm3 and will be discharged

through a stack of 30.0 m height for effective dispersion of emissions into

the atmosphere.

Furthermore, facility for sampling such as ladder, platform, and sampling

point will be provided as per the GPCB guidelines.

Air Pollution Control Measures of Production Facilities

Sr. No.

Plant/Section Pollution sources Pollutant emissions

Mitigation measures

1 Raw Materials

Handling Section (RMHS)

Open stockpiles,

blending & blending yard, conveyor

transportation for all production facilities

Closed area crushing/ screening

bunkers loading

Fugitive dusts

Fugitive dusts

Water

sprinkling, covered

conveyors, dry fogging at transfer points

Bag filter based Dust Extraction

(DE) system




2 Kiln of Pellet

plant

Kiln waste gas

generated from fuel burning

SO2, NOx,

Dusts

Bag filters

3 Rotary Kiln of DRI Plant

Kiln waste gas SO2, NOx, Dusts

ESP

4 DRI Plant -process area

cleaning vents

Secondary emissions

from Rotary Kiln

Dusts Bag Filter

5 SMS Secondary emissions at the time of charging of

sponge Iron

Dusts/fumes

Fume Extraction system with bag filters

6 Captive Power Plant

Flue gas NOx, Dusts ESP & low NOx burner

10.3.1.2 Action plan for control of fugitive emission

Fugitive emission is expected during storage, handling, and conveying of

coal, iron ore and other raw material, material transfer point. Dust will be

generated during loading & unloading, transportation of material through

conveyor. In addition to this, charging point of scrap in furnace is another

major source of fugitive emission. There will also chances of generation of

fugitive emission from vehicular movement in the premises.

Unit will adopt following measures to control fugitive emission,

Dust suppression system (water sprinklers) will be provided in coal

unloading area,

Dust suction system will be provided to control fugitive emission

generated from melting of scrap,


stack attached with induction furnace,

The Continuous Casting Operation is selected for the production of

billets in induction furnace to reduce the gaseous emission,


prevent flying of dust during conveying. The dust from covered

conveyers will be sucked and cleaned in APC system,

All production shop having high heat emission in them will be

designed for natural ventilation to make use of draft created by the

density difference and selecting effective roof monitors suitable for

this purpose,




All internal roads will be asphalted/concreted to prevent fugitive

dust emission due to vehicular movement.

PPEs will be provided to the workers,

Electro Static Precipitator (ESP) will be provided to bring down the

PM to 50 mg/Nm3 for DRI plant and 30 mg/Nm3 for Power plant,

Fly ash will be stored in covered sheds only,

Greenbelt will be developed around the plant, and

Frequent work area monitoring will be done to ensure fugitive

emissions level.

10.3.2 Water Environment

Total water requirement of the project will be 1018 KLD; Out of 1018

KLD, 905 KLD fresh water required and 113 KLD recycle water from

wastewater/domestic water. This includes water for Pellet Plant, DRI

plant, Induction Furnace, Rolling Mill, Power Plant, domestic, greenbelt

and ash & dust suppression. Water requirement of the project will be

sourced from Ground water. Water drawl permission from CGWA is under

process, refer Annexure-II of EIA report.

Effluent Management

There will be no wastewater generation from the pellet, DRI, SMS &

Rolling Mill processes, as closed-circuit cooling system will be

provided.

Only source of wastewater generation will be cooling tower bleed

off, boiler blow down & DM plant regeneration and sewage.

Effluent from power plant will be treated in ETP and after ensuring

compliance with SPCB norms, partly utilized for slag cooling &

partly sent to RO followed by MEE.

Sewage will be treated in Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) and

treated water will be utilized for Greenbelt development.

ETP, STP, RO and MEE will be installed with adequate capacity and

operate efficiently to maintain discharge norms. In any case EMS

system will not work properly; immediate action will be taken to

rectify it.




Effluent Treatment Scheme (Power Plant)

pH of the boiler blow down will be between 9.5 to 10.5. Hence a

neutralization tank will be constructed for neutralizing the effluent of

boiler blow down, DM plant regeneration water. After neutralization,

these two effluent streams will be mixed with Cooling Tower bleed off in a

Central Monitoring Basin (CMB). Then, part of the effluent will be directly

reused for slag cooling (15 KLD) and part of it (95 KLD) will be passed

through RO. RO eject will be taken to Multi Effect Evaporator (MEE). RO

permeate (75 KLD) and Condensate of MEE (18 KLD) will be reused in

utility. No effluent will be let out of the plant premises. Hence, unit will

achieve Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD). Sewage will be treated in Sewage

Treatment Plant (STP) and treated water will be utilized for Greenbelt

development.

Treated effluent disposal

Total effluent generation from project: 110 m3/day

(Excluding sewage)

Effluent quantity to be used for slag cooling: 15 m3/day

RO permeate to be used for utility: 75.0 m3/day

MEE condensate to be used for utility: 18.0 m3/day

1.5 KLD system loss and 0.5 TPD salt generation from MEE

Details of ETP units

Sr. No. Unit Dimension Capacity (m3)

1 Collection Tank 5.25 x 5.25 x 4.5

(4.0 WD)

110.25

2 Neutralization

tank

2.5 x 2.5 x 3.5

(3.0 WD)

18.75

3 Settling tank 8 x 4 x 2.5

(1.5 SD)

Surface area 32 m2

4 Treated effluent

sump/basin

5.25 x 5.25 x 4.5

(4.0 WD)

110.25

5 Sludge Drying

bed

10 x 5 x 1.5 Surface area 50 m2

6 RO 2 set 5 m3/hr. each

7 MEE 1 1 m3/hr.




10.3.3 Hazardous & Solid Waste Management

Hazardous waste generation:

Main source of hazardous waste generation will be ETP sludge (5.0

MT/month), MEE salt (13 MT/month), used lubricating oil (5.0 Kl/year),

discarded drums/containers (500 nos./month).

Hazardous waste Management:







of hazardous waste.


The solid wastes generation includes fly ash, Dolochar, Mill scales and

slag.

Solid waste Management:

Ash will be sold to brick manufacturers. Dolochar will be used in FBC

power plant as fuel/brick manufacturing. Slag after crushing and iron

removal, used in road construction/brick manufacturing. Mill scales will be

reused in the Pellet Plant.

Details of Solid and hazardous waste disposal are given comprehensively

in Chapter 2 (Table 2.11).

Storage and Transportation of Solid/Hazardous Waste:

Proper Hazardous waste storage area with impervious flooring and

covered shed will be provided for storage of solid & hazardous waste.

Entire quantity of the solid & hazardous waste will be stored in the

isolated hazardous waste storage area within premises having leachate

collection system and roof cover. The storage yard shall be properly

labeled for identification of wastes.

Solid & Hazardous waste shall not be stored for a period more than 90

days. Records of the same shall be maintained and make them

available for inspection.




Properly packed & labeled hazardous waste shall be transported

through dedicated vehicle to authorized TSDF facility.

10.3.4 Noise Control

Unit proposes following noise control measures to minimize the impact of

noise on the environment during the operational phase,

All equipments proposed to be used will be of internationally reputed

make.

As a precautionary measure, enclosures will be provided wherever

possible for all the major mechanical units to arrest the sound waves

travelling outside the plant area.

Silencers, anti-vibration pad, acoustic enclosure to equipment will be

provided.

The air compressor, process air blower, pneumatic valves etc., will be

provided with acoustic enclosure

Acoustic enclosure will be provided to turbines.

Ear muff, ear plug will be provided to all workers working at noisy

area.

The ambient noise levels will be less than 75 dB(A) during day time &

less than 70 dB(A) during night time. Hence, there will not be any

adverse impact on habitations due to the proposed activities.

Adequate greenbelt will be developed within industrial premises and

around the periphery to prevent the noise pollution.

Periodic monitoring of noise levels as per post-project monitoring plan

shall be done on regular basis.

By taking measures as mentioned above, it is anticipated that noise

levels in the plant will be maintained below the permissible limit.

10.3.5 Green Belt Development

Tree plantation is one of the effective remedial measures to control the

air pollution and noise pollution. The objectives of the industrial greenbelt

are to improve the micro-environment. It also causes aesthetics

improvement of the area as well as sustains and supports the biosphere.

The unit proposed to develop greenbelt in area of 50500 m2, which will be

33% of the total area of the project.




Design of Green Belt

As far as possible, following guidelines will be considered in greenbelt

development.

The spacing between the trees will be maintained as per SPCB

guideline i.e. 1 tree/4 sq. m.

Spaces, so that the trees may grow vertically and slightly increase

the effective height of the greenbelt.

Planting of trees in each row will be in staggered orientation.

The short trees (< 10 m height) will be planted in the first two rows

(towards plant side) of the green belt. The tall trees (> 10 m height)

will be planted in the outer three rows (away from plant side).

Planting methodology

The plantation shall be done in pits. The pit shall be refilled with soil after

the planting. The sampling of healthy, nursery raised, seedlings in

polythene containers shall be transported in baskets. Planting shall be

done after first monsoon showers. The level of soil is about 10 cm above

of ground level. The soil around the plant shall be pressed to form a low

trough. About 25 gm chemical fertilizers shall be added. Watering shall be

continued after plantation if any dry spells follows. Planted area shall be

inspected and mortality rate ensured for each species. The dead and

drying plant shall be replaced by fresh seedlings.

Selection of species for greenbelt

For the development of greenbelt, plants having simple big leaves and

native species are preferred. The plant species will be considered based

on following:

The plant should be fast growing.

It should have thick canopy cover.

It should be perennial and evergreen.

It should have large leaf area index.

It should be indigenous.

It should be efficient in absorbing pollutants without significant effects

on plant growth.




It is also advisable to select suitable tree species and adopt simple

techniques which require minimum investment and care.

Floral species recommended for greenbelt

Azadirachta indica (Neem), Albizia lebbeck (Siris), Pongamiapinnata

(Karanj), Ficusreligiosa (Peepal) are suggested for the greenbelt

development with respect to this particular area. They are mostly

deciduous and evergreen tree types suitable to grow in the area.

Survival rate of trees and post plantation care

Considering the availability of water and general survey of surrounding

area, the survival rate is expected to be around 70-75%. Moreover, the

wire net guards will be provided to protect the saplings. The same will be

properly manured and watered so that it can grow well.

Protection of plantation site:

Protection from grazing will be done by erecting tree guards around

planted sapling.

Though the tree suggested for plantation will require very less water,

however during the first year watering will be done twice in a day.

There after watering will be done twice in a week.

The manuring will be done when plantation take up. For this propose

cow dung will be dump in the pit. No other manuring will be required

for proposed plantation. Cow dung is easily available in the study area.

Organic manure and chemical free herbal pesticide will be used.

Damaged plants will be replaced with new plants.

Strict surveillance will be made to increase the survival rate of the

trees.

10.3.6 Occupational health hazard and mitigation measures

In operational phase of the project, various effects on occupational health

and safety of the employees working in the plant are envisaged. Major

health and safety issues encountered will be physical hazards, respiratory

hazards, electrical hazards, noise, fire hazards associated while working

within the plant.




Possible occupational health hazards are given below

Workers gets exposed to high temperatures which ultimately leads to

fatigue and dehydration posing severe negative impact on human

health.

Workers also exposed to high noise level in areas namely scarp

loading/unloading, scrap sorting and scrap charging into furnace.

Contact with hot metal or hot water may result in severe burns.

Dust generated in such type of project includes metallic dusts which

are present in melting, casting and finishing activity.

Dust generated due to high temperature operations, fine particle size

and metallurgical fumes create serious occupational inhalation risk

and burning of eyes.

Lifting and moving heavy loads at elevated heights using hydraulic

platforms and cranes presents a significant physical hazard to the

workers working in such project.

Other occupational impacts associated with the project are injuries

related to handling and cutting activities associated with the use of

metal scarp.

Handling of liquid metal may generate risk of explosion, melt run-out

and burns in addition to fires caused by melted metal.

Proposed Mitigation Measures:

Following mitigation measures for prevention and control of various

occupational hazards associated with the plant operations are as follows:

Clear signage in all working areas

Implementation of specific load handling and lifting procedures

Train staff in handling of lifting equipment, working at height,

handling molten metal, working with electrical systems

Provide training to workers in the hazards related with working in hot

environment, adopting safe work practices, control measures and the

use & maintenance of personal protective equipments

Proper handling and shielding of moving hot liquids, as well as solid

metal parts




Material and product handling shall remain within restricted zones

under supervision

Conduct regular maintenance of all the mechanical equipments

Shield surfaces where close contact with hot equipment or splashing

from hot materials is expected like induction melting ladles and

casting etc.

Necessary PPEs, safety equipment will be provided to employees to

ensure healthy & safe work conditions

Regular inspection for PPEs & Safety equipment/material will be done

The proponent shall ensure implementation of emergency

management plan with provision of fire-fighting equipment/facilities,

first aid & medical facilities, evacuation procedures etc.

All incoming scrap shall be tested prior to use as feed stock material

to prevent entry of any device containing explosives.

Exhaust ventilation shall be installed at the significant point sources of

dust and gas emissions.

Implement a policy for periodical personal health checks

Organize regular mock drills for unsafe situations.

Workers getting exposed to high heat reaction should have showering

ventilation devices in all radiating heat zones of adequate capacity.

With effective implementation of the mitigation measures suggested, the

occupational health and safety impacts can be controlled.

10.3.6.1 Personal Protective Equipment

Table 10.1 List of PPEs

Protection Type of PPE Qty.

Head protection Helmet 750 nos.

Hand protection Asbestos Gloves 500 pairs

Electric Hand 100 pairs

Foot protection Safety shoes 750 pairs

Gum boots 500 pairs

Heat protection Fire suit 10 nos.

Working at height Safety belts 10 Sets

Hearing Protection Ear plug 150 pairs

Ear muff 150 pairs

Eye protection Goggles 750 nos.




Face shield 75 nos.

Respiratory

protection

Dust mask 750 nos.

10.3.6.2 Plans for Periodic Medical Checkup

Part time doctor will be appointed for health check-up of each

employee.

Pre-employment health check-up will be followed by periodical health

check-up with special attention to occupational health.

Medical records of each employee will be maintained in prescribed

format as per Factory Act.

The health check-up will be conducted as per the pre-designed format

which will include chest X-rays, Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision

Testing, ECG, Blood and urine test etc.

The work zone monitoring will be conducted on regular basis.

Monitoring of the Occupational Injury & Its Impact on workers

The action plan will be prepared to monitor the injury to workers:

Each workplace will be evaluated for the existing work conditions.

Unsafe Act & unsafe practices will be identified.

Unsafe equipment, unsafe areas, etc., will be identified.

Area will be checked for proper Ventilation and Illumination.

Evaluation of training & on the job work.

Impact of the above mentioned unsafe conditions on workers will be

studied and remedial measures for the same will be adopted.

10.4 POST-PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING

The highlights of the integrated environmental monitoring plan are:

The stack monitoring facilities like ladder, platform and port-hole of all

the stacks maintained in good condition.

Regular monitoring of all gaseous emissions from stacks & fugitive

emissions in the process areas.

The performance of air pollution control equipments will be evaluated

based on these monitoring results.

Water consumption in the unit recorded daily.

Analysis of effluent will be carried out regularly.




Performance of effluent treatment plant units, RO and MEE will be

evaluated based on above analysis results.

Regular noise level monitoring carried out.

Greenbelt properly maintained and new plantation programmes

undertaken frequently.

Continued environmental awareness programmes carried out within

the employees and also in the surrounding villages.

Locations and frequency of monitoring as per the guidelines of SPCB and

MoEF&CC are tabulated below.

Table 10.2 Environment Monitoring Plan

Nature of

Analysis

Frequency of

analysis with its analyzer

Parameters No. of

samples

Wastewater

analysis

Monthly by external

agency

pH, TDS, SS,

COD, BOD, Oil & Grease, etc.

2-3 samples

Stack Monitoring Monthly by external agency

PM, SO2, NOX All stacks

Ambient Air

Quality Monitoring

Monthly for 24

hours or as per the statutory conditions by external agency

PM10, PM2.5, SO2,

NOX

3-5 locations

Noise level Monthly as per the

statutory conditions by external agency

Noise level 8-10

locations

Fugitive emission monitoring

Monthly by external agency

PM 10-12 locations

Health check-up of

workers

As per the

statutory guideline

All workers

10.5 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT BUDGET ALLOCATION

Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum earmarked for environment

pollution control measures will be as under.

Table 10.3 Budget Allocation for Environment Management

Sr.

No.

Particulars Capital Cost

(Rs. in Lakhs)

Recurring Cost

per annum (Rs. in Lakh)

1 Air Pollution Control 3112 425

2 Water Pollution Control 450 170

3 Noise Pollution Control 45 10

4 Solid/Hazardous Waste Management

300 140

5 Environment Monitoring

and Management

15 15




6 Occupational Health 10 10

7 Green Belt Development Plan 38 25

8 Rain Water Harvesting System 30 5

Total 4000 800

10.6 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL

Genext will set up separate Environment Management Cell (EMC) to

implementation of all the mitigation measures. The project proponent

shall provide a fully equipped laboratory to carry out the analysis.

The major duties & responsibilities of EMC will be as follows:

To implement the Environmental Management Plan,

To ensure regular operation & maintenance of pollution control

devices,

To assure regulatory compliance with all relevant rules & regulations,

To minimize environmental impacts by strict adherence to the EMP,

To initiate environmental monitoring as per approved schedule,

Review & interpretation of monitored results and corrective measures

in case monitored results are above the specified limit,

Maintain documentation of good environmental practices and

applicable environmental laws as ready reference,

Maintain environmental related records,

Coordination with regulatory agencies, external consultants and

monitoring laboratories, and

Maintaining log of public complaints and the action taken.




10.6.1 Hierarchical Structure of Environmental Management Cell

The hierarchical structure of Genext is given below:

Figure 10.1: Environment Management Cell

10.6.2 Reporting System of Non-Compliances/Violations of

Environmental Norms

Record keeping and reporting of performance is an important

management tool for ensuring sustainable operation of the unit. Records

are maintained for regulatory, monitoring and operational issues.

The mechanism is summarized below:

1. Identify deviation/non-compliance/violation of environmental norms

as lay down in consent to operate and EC. Record to

communication/complain received from plausible stake holder.

2. The EHS manager will identify deviation/non-compliance/violation

from failure to comply with statutory requirements.

3. Respond from EHS manager within reasonable time limit to concern

authorities with c/c mark to Technical head.

4. Technical head will take it in action and give necessary guideline to

comply this deviation/non-compliance/violation of environmental

norms. Parallel arrange budget for necessary action to comply the

condition.

Director - Project

Environment Engineer

Manager (EHS)

ETP/RO/MEE incharge

ETP operator

Safety

Officer

Vice President - Project

Incharge of

APC system




5. Communication received from the EHS manager will be discussed in

technical management meeting.

6. Board discussion, Decision and Action

The chairperson will review the information available and take a

decision depending on the seriousness of the violation.

The decision will be taken to ensure the compliance of non-

compliance/violation of environmental norms and it’s safeguarded.

The decision will be taken by consensus and if no consensus is

arrived at, voting will be conducted.

Enlist measures that would undertake to ensure that deviations/

non-compliance/violations of Environmental norms do not occur

again in future.

10.6.3 Framework for Continual Improvement of Environmental

Performance of Organization

10.7 RESOURCE CONSERVATION AND CLEANER PRODUCTION

Steps that are undertaken by the industry are given below:

Integrated plant technology will conserve around 30% of energy by

way of direct hot material/mass transfer from one process to another

process.

Waste Heat will be utilized for power generations which also reduce

fuel cost around 25%.

RO permeate and MEE condensate will be reused to reduce fresh

water demand.

EMP

Implementation

Monitoring as

per EMP

requirement

Internal and

External Audits Corrective and

Preventive Actions

Review and revision of EMP

based on Environmental

Performance Evaluation Improvement

Mitigation

measures




Housekeeping will be regularly maintained. Dedicated staff for the

purpose will be employed.

Solid wastes e.g. powders, spills, etc. in process and packaging are

to be separately collected and disposed of instead of allowing these

to effluent streams. This will reduce load to treatment and increase

the efficiency of treatment system.

Dust extraction system will be provided for reduction of fugitive

emissions and leakages.

Rain water harvesting system will be adopted to reduce the fresh

water requirement.

10.8 ENERGY CONSERVATION PROGRAMME

Energy conservation measures are often the easiest, quickest and

cheapest way to reduce costs and be environmentally pro-active. The

conservation efforts would consist of the following:

Ensure proper selection fuel-firing equipments - Burners, mechanical

stokers, etc.

Reduce radiation losses from boilers, furnaces and auxiliary

equipment by improved thermal insulation. This will also improve the

working conditions within the building and eliminate unnecessary

ventilation,

Schedule process operations to avoid fluctuations in boiler loads,

Keep the heat transfer surfaces clean by preventing excessive scale

formation,

Pressure vessels should be designed with a length to diameter ratio

of roughly three as they are the most economical,

Maximize the use of natural lighting through design,

CFLs or LED lights are used in administration building and plant

premises,

Ensure natural ventilation of hot industrial buildings and to take

advantage of internal heat to produce natural draft to conserve

energy of the mechanical equipments,

Constant monitoring of energy consumption and defining targets for

energy conservation,




Maximize the use of laptop computers over desk top computers as

Laptops use less energy than desk tops and leave a smaller

environmental footprint at end of life,

Adjusting the settings and illumination levels to ensure minimum

energy used for desired comfort levels,

Recycling of water will be done,

Training to staffs on methods of energy conservation.

10.9 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) refers to voluntary actions

undertaken by company/organization either to improve the living

conditions (economically, socially, environmentally) of local communities

or to reduce the negative effects of the project. Socio-economic

development activities is a concept of organization whereby organizations

serve the interests of society by taking responsibility for the impact of

their activities on customers, employees, shareholders, communities and

the environment in all aspects of their operations.

Genext Steels will actively contribute to improve the Socio-economic

conditions of the area by providing assistance to local persons preferable

from the nearby villages. The continuing commitment by business to

behave ethically and contribute to economic development while improve

the quality of life of workforce and their families as well as that of the

local community and society at large. Socio economic study provides

direction for the Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) activities

and gives clear picture about the areas of intervention for the

improvement by CER activities to the project proponent. Based on the

primary study and secondary data of the socio–economic condition for 13

villages within 10 km radius of the project site, the following socio-

economic development activities under Corporate Environment

Responsibility (CER) programme are suggested/ recommended.

Socio Economic Survey within study area is prescribing in chapter-7 of

EIA report. Based on the SIA study, outcomes are health, education,

sanitation, sustainable livelihood & infrastructure development in the




Target Project Area for CER activities. This may vary depending upon

public demand during Public Hearing.

Details of proposed expenditure for CER activities:

Estimated cost of the project : Rs. 261.0 Crores

Expenditure earmarked towards CER : Rs. 5.22 Crores

(2% of the project cost)

The detailed expenditure break-up of above activities for the five years

are given in below table:

Table 10.4 Detailed expenditure for CER activities

Sr.

No.

Activities Years (Rs. in Crores) Total Budget

(Rs. in Crore) 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th

1. Educational facilities

& trade training to

educated

unemployed youth

0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 1.0

2. Health and Family

Welfare facilities

0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 1.5

3. Drinking water and

sanitation facilities

0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 1.3

4. Women

Empowerment

activities

0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.9

5. Preservation of

Environment and

Sustainable

Development-

Maintaining village

ponds, encouraging

rain water harvesting

in villages

0.12 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.52

Total 1.06 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 5.22

Grand Total 5.22




Chapter-11

Summary & Conclusion

11.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

11.1.1 General Introduction

M/s. Genext Steels Private Limited is a Greenfield project, proposes

establishment of mini integrated steel plant with captive power plant. It

comprises of Pellet plant (Pellets – 800 TPD), DRI Kilns (Sponge Iron -

600 TPD), Steel Melting Shop (MS Billets – 1000 TPD), Rolling Mill

(Structural Steel, TMT Bars & Rolled products – 975 TPD), Power


and 5 MW through Fluidized Bed Combustion (FBC) Boiler].

Project activity falls under item 3(a), categorized as Category ‘A’ project

as per the Schedule of EIA Notification, 2006 and its subsequent

amendments.

11.1.2 Project location and Environment Sensitivity

Features Details

Location Vill: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla,

Dist: Ahmedabad

Coordinates of Centre of the project site

Latitude: 22°37’35.22”N Longitude: 72° 9’48.72”E


Topography Plain


Nearest




Railway Station Arnej Railway Station, about 12.0 km towards ESE direction

Highway NH8A (A’bad-Rajkot), about 523.45 m

towards S direction SH8 (Bagodara-Vataman), about 4.4 km

towards ENE direction

Air Port Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel International Airport,

Ahmedabad, about 67.0 km towards NE direction

Water body Bhogavo River (Seasonal), about 0.7 km

towards S direction

Reserve Forests/National None within 10 km radius,




Park/Wildlife Sanctuary Nalsarovar Bird Sanctuary, about 12 km

towards NNW direction



place



11.1.3 Salient features of the project

Proposed production

capacity

Integrated steel project with captive power

plant

Plot Area 37.82 Acre (153061 m2)

Proposed project cost Rs. 261 Crores

Manpower requirement About 500-700 persons

Power Requirement 57 MW, Source: Captive power plant & State

Grid - Gujarat State Electricity Corporation

Limited

Water Requirement Total: 1018 KLD; Fresh water: 905 KLD;

Source of water: Bore well

Wastewater Generation Industrial: 110 KLD, ZLD

Domestic: 20 KLD

Fuel Requirement Imported Coal: 728 TPD

Dolochar: 100 TPD

HSD for all D.G. Sets: 410 lit/hr.

Source of Air Emission Pellet plant (4 stacks of 4 nos. of kiln & 4

stacks of 4 nos. of D G Sets), DRI plant (4 stacks of 4 nos. of rotary kiln & 4 stacks of 4

nos. of D G Sets), SMS plant (4 stacks of 4 nos. of induction furnace & 4 stacks of 4 nos. of D G Sets), Power plant (stacks of WHRB & FBC

boiler)

Details of Haz. Waste Haz. waste: ETP sludge, MEE Salt, used Oil, Discarded drums/containers

Solid waste: SMS slag, ash from boiler & APCD

11.1.4 Investment of the project

Estimated cost of the proposed project will be around Rs. 261.0 crores.

Out of this, Rs. 40.0 crores will be earmarked as capital investment for

EMS and Rs. 8.0 crores will be recurring/operating cost per annum.

11.1.5 List of products

Product details with its capacity are given in table below.

Sr.

No.

Production Unit Product Plant

Configuration

Production

Capacity






3 Steel Melting

Shop

MS Billets Induction

furnace: 4 x 25 MT/heat CCM: Eight-

strand billet caster

975 TPD



2 x 500 TPD 1000 TPD

5 Power Plant



Following raw materials will be used in proposed steel plant.

Unit Description

Pellet Manufacturing of pellet using iron ore/iron oxide (mill

scale), bentonite, and imported coal as raw materials

DRI Kiln Manufacturing of Sponge Iron using pellet, imported coal,

dolomite as raw materials

Induction

Furnace

Manufacturing of MS Billets using Sponge Iron, M S

Scrap, Ferro Alloys as raw materials

Rolling Mill Manufacturing of Rolled Product using Billets

Power plant By utilizing hot waste flue gases from DRI kilns in WHRB.

By utilizing Coal & Dolochar in FBC boiler as fuel.

11.2 DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT

11.2.1 Baseline Environmental Study

To predict the impact of the project on the surrounding environment, the

current baseline environmental status was studied by collecting the data

and carrying out monitoring during January, 2018 to March, 2018 in

the study area of 10 km radius from project site as per the TOR.

11.2.2 Air Environment

The ambient air quality monitoring was carried out at 8 AAQM locations,

to assess the existing sub-regional air quality status during the period of

January, 2018 to March, 2018.

Combined Sampler along with the analytical methods, prescribed by

CPCB was used for carrying out air quality monitoring. At all these

sampling locations; PM10, PM2.5, SO2 and NOx were monitored on 24-

hourly basis to enable the comparison with ambient air quality standards

prescribed by the CPCB. The data on concentrations of various pollutants

were processed for different statistical parameters like arithmetic mean,




standard deviation, minimum and maximum concentration and various

percentile values. The results are summarized below:

Particulate Matter (PM10) An average and 98th percentile value of 24-hourly PM10 values at all the

locations varied between 59.7 – 73.4 g/m3 and 63.4 – 77.1 g/m3,

which are well within the stipulated standard of CPCB, 100 g/m3.

Particulate Matter (PM2.5)

An average and 98th percentile value of 24-hourly PM2.5 values at all the

locations varied between 32.6 – 41.3 g/m3 and 37.0 – 45.2 g/m3,

which are well within the stipulated standard of CPCB, 60 g/m3.

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)

An average and 98th percentile value of 24-hourly SO2 value of arithmetic

mean at all the locations ranged between 10.9 – 15.8 g/m3 and 12.0 –

17.8 g/m3 respectively, which are well within the stipulated standards of

80 g/m3.

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)

An average and 98th percentile value of 24-hourly NOx value of arithmetic

mean at all the locations ranged between 13.6 - 19.6 g/m3 and 15.1 -

24.2 g/m3 respectively, which are much lower than the standards

stipulated by CPCB, i.e. 80 g/m3.

Conclusion:

The quality of ambient air in the study area is compared with AAQM

Standards prescribed by CPCB & found below the prescribed standards.

11.2.3 Water Environment

Six surface water & eight ground water samples were collected during the

study period.

Surface Water Quality

Surface water samples were collected from ponds of Bagodara,

Gundanapara, Rohika, Mithapur, Shiyal and Dhingda Village. Results of

the same are given in Chapter-3 of EIA report.

Conclusion:

It was observed that all the physico-chemical parameters and heavy

metals from surface water samples, except turbidity in all samples and




TDS in Rohika village, are below stipulated drinking water standards and

selected source are suitable for domestic purposes.

Ground Water Quality

Ground water samples have been collected from Project Site, Bagodara,

Sarala, Rohika, Shiyal, Gundanapara, Mithapur, Jansali.

The summary of the analysis is as below:

Color: All the samples were found color less meeting desirable norms.

pH: All the samples meet the desirable standards (pH ranges from 7.5-

7.9).

Total Dissolved Solids (TDS): TDS in samples ranges from 1963 mg/L

(Bagodara) to 2948 mg/L (Jansali), all the samples exceed the

permissible limit of 2000 mg/L, except Bagodara village, which is almost

close to permissible limit.

Calcium: Calcium contents in the water ranges from 68 mg/L (Sarala) to

109 mg/L (Shiyal), all the samples meet the permissible limit of 200


Magnesium: Magnesium content in the water ranges from 37 mg/L

(Shiyal) to 52 mg/L (Project Site). All the samples meet the permissible

limit of 100 mg/L (Permissible Limit in the Absence of Alternate Source).

Sulfate: Sulfate content in the water ranges from 104 mg/L (Bagodara)

to 204 mg/L (Jansali). All the samples meet the permissible limit of 400


Fluoride: Fluoride content in the water ranges from 0.63 mg/L (Shiyal &

Jansali) to 0.72 mg/L (Project Site). All the samples meet the permissible

limit (1.5 mg/L).

Total Alkalinity: Total alkalinity in the water samples ranges from 349

mg/L (Sarala & Rohika) to 410 mg/L (Project site). All the samples are

within the permissible limit of drinking water (600 mg/L) (Permissible

Limit in the Absence of Alternate Source).

Other Parameters: Potassium (ranges from 42 mg/L to 103 mg/L),

Sodium (ranges from 622 mg/L to 1002 mg/L) and Chloride (ranges from

958 mg/L to 1486 mg/L). Chlorides in all the samples exceed the

permissible limit of 1000 mg/L, except Bagodara village.




Heavy metals like cadmium, copper, lead, chromium, iron and zinc are

well below the limit in all samples.

Conclusion:

The results have been compared with the drinking water quality

standards specified in IS: 10500-2012. All the samples meet the

permissible limit set by the authority (BIS) except TDS and Chloride.

TDS & Chlorides in all the samples exceed the permissible limit of 2000

mg/L & 1000 mg/L respectively, except Bagodara village.

11.2.4 Noise Environment

Noise monitoring has been conducted at ten locations in the study area.

The Leq (Ld) values of noise levels during day-time varies from 50.0 to

56.6 dB(A) and the night time Leq (Ln) varies from 40.6 to 45.9 dB(A)

within the study area. Higher noise value of 56.6 dB(A) was recorded

during day time Nr. Bus stop Bagodara & lower noise value of 40.6 dB(A)

was recorded during night time at Primary School Shiyal.

11.2.5 Soil Quality

Soil samples were collected from 8 different locations and analyzed to

assess the soil quality prevailing in the study area. Physical

characteristics of soil have been delineated through specific parameters,

viz. particle size distribution (grain size analysis), porosity, water holding

capacity and permeability whereas data for chemical characterization of

soil, viz. pH, electrical conductivity, cation exchange capacity and sodium

absorption ratio have been analyzed.

11.2.6 Biological Environment

Baseline data for flora & fauna has been collected with its family. It was

found that, none of the species of conservation importance exists in the

study area and no endangered species are found in the study area.

11.2.7 Socio-Economic Environment

Socio-economic study includes description of demography, available basic

amenities like housing, health care services, transportation, education

facilities. Information on the above said parameters has been collected to

define the socio-economic profile of the study area (10-km radius).




11.3 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION

MEASURES

Impact identification has been carried out for various activities involved in

construction as well as operational phase of the project and prediction

has been done for significant impacts. The summary of anticipated

adverse environmental impacts due to proposed project and mitigation

measures is given below.

11.3.1 Summary of impacts on Air Environment:

(a) During construction phase & Mitigation measures

Main sources of impact during construction phase are due to movement

of vehicles & construction equipment at site, foundation works,

transportation of construction material etc. Water sprinkling in the vicinity

of the construction area will be done to control dust. PUC certified

vehicles will be used. Temporary barricades will be provided to reduce

spreading of particulates from construction area.

(b) During operation phase & Mitigation measures

Flue gas emission will be from stack attached with Pellet plant (stacks of

4 nos. of kiln & 4 nos. of D G Sets), stack of DRI Kiln (stacks of 4 nos. of

rotary kiln & 4 nos. of D G Sets), SMS plant (stacks of 4 nos. of induction

furnace equipped with suction hood with adequate capacity & 4 nos. of D

G Sets), Power plant (stacks of WHRB & FBC boiler). Dolochar (by

products of DRI Kiln) & imported coal will be used as a fuel. HSD will use

as fuel for D.G. set, which will used on in case of emergency.

Prediction of impacts on air environment is quantified using ISCST3

model. Maximum Ground level concentrations of 24-hr average for SPM,

SO2 & NOx from the proposed activity are 11.741 g/m3, 8.423 g/m3

and 7.842 g/m3, respectively. These GLCs are expected to occur at a

distance of 1.0 km from the source in S direction. The obtained GLCs are

well within the 24-hourly ambient air quality standards stipulated by

CPCB. However, to mitigate the impact due to the proposed, following

pollution control system along with stack height for all the facilities in the




Steel Plant from 11 m to 75 m depending on the emission volume and

pollutants loading is proposed.

Sr.

No.

Source Air pollution control

equipment

Probable

pollutants

1. Pellet plant Bag filter PM <50 mg/NM3

SO2 <100 ppm

NOX <50 ppm

2. DRI Kiln Electro Static Precipitators (ESP) PM <50 mg/NM3

3. SMS plant Fume Extraction system with bag

filters

PM <50 mg/NM3

4. Power plant Electro Static Precipitator (ESP) PM <30 mg/NM3

Apart from the above, Fume extraction system with bag filters, dust

suppression system, covered conveyers etc. will also be installed.

11.3.2 Summary of impacts on Water Environment

(a) Impacts during construction phase & Mitigation measures:

Temporary impacts are likely to occur due to water consumption &

sewage generation. It will not be significant as water requirement would

be temporary during construction phase. Proper sanitation facilities with

adequate disposal system will be provided within the operational plant.

(b) Impacts during operation phase & Mitigation measures:

Fresh water requirement of the unit will be satisfied from bore well. Total

water requirement for the project will be around 1018 KLD; out of which,

905 KLD fresh water requirement and 113 KLD recycle water (Domestic

water after STP, RO permeate, MEE condensate).


m3/day. There will be no process wastewater generation from the Pellet,

DRI, SMS & Rolling Mill processes, as closed-circuit cooling system will be

provided. Only source of wastewater generation will be cooling tower

bleed off, boiler blow down & DM plant regeneration. Effluent will be

treated in ETP. Then, part of the effluent (13 KLD) will be directly reused

for slag cooling and second part of it (95 KLD) will be passed through RO.

RO eject will be taken to Multi Effect Evaporator (MEE). RO permeate (75

KLD) and Condensate of MEE (18 KLD) will be reused in utility. No

effluent will be let out of the plant premises. Hence, unit will achieve Zero

Liquid Discharge (ZLD).




Domestic wastewater generation will be 20 KLD, which will be utilized for

green belt after treatment given into STP. Hence, no impact on the water

environment is envisaged.

11.3.3 Impacts on Noise quality & Mitigation measures


During construction phase, major sources of noise are vehicle’s

movement & construction activities. High noise producing activities will be

restricted to daytime only. Well maintained equipments will be used to

prevent noise. Usage of PPE by workers will be made compulsory.


During the operation phase, the noise will generate due to the operation

of pumps, compressors, turbines, boiler, blowers, compressors, vehicular

movement etc. The impact is found to be insignificant outside the

premises. Acoustic enclosure will be provided to noise generating

machineries. Unit will provide necessary PPEs like earplugs or earmuffs to

all workers working in high noise area. Selection of any new plant

equipment will be made with specification of low noise levels.

11.3.4 Summary of Impacts on Land Environment


The construction activities like excavation, leveling & vehicular

movements will change the landscape, which are expected to be of short

duration & insignificant. Preliminary activities like proper storage of

construction materials & proper management will be done within the

project area. Therefore, impact will be negligible. Unit will provide

sanitation facilities for the staff engaged in construction work which will

prevent the impacts on land.


Hazardous wastes will have significant negative impacts if disposed

unsystematically. Unit will provide all required structural facilities like

separate hazardous waste storage room with RCC floor, leachate

collection system, and concrete floors within premises. Hence, no

significant negative impact is envisaged on the land environment.




11.3.5 Summary of impact on Socio Economy


As it is a Greenfield project, around 150-200 workers for the construction

work will be required. Local contractors to be employed for construction,

so no other issues like social conflict are envisaged. Temporary

employment generated during construction of project will have beneficial

impacts on economic environment.


Project will require about 500-700 persons for its operation, which result

into a positive impact on prevailing socio-economic environment. Project

will also have potential of indirect employment due to the increase

transportation activities, contractual works as well as opportunity of

trade. Thus, overall impacts on socio-economic environment are long

term and positive in nature.

11.3.6 Summary of impact on Ecology

There are no protected areas like National Park/Wildlife Sanctuary within

the 10 km radial periphery of the project site so there will not be any

significant impact on ecology.

11.4 ENVIRONMENT MONITORING PROGRAMME

The unit will have dedicated Environment Management Cell to monitor

and evaluate the environmental performance and to supervise the EMS

and for compliances of EC provisions to the authorities. Below Post-

project monitoring programme will be followed.

Environment Monitoring Program

Nature of

Analysis

Frequency of

analysis with its analyzer

Parameters No. of

samples

Wastewater analysis

Monthly by external agency

pH, TDS, SS, COD, BOD, Oil &

Grease, etc.

2-3 samples

Stack Monitoring Monthly by external

agency

PM, SO2, NOX All stacks

Ambient Air

Quality Monitoring

Monthly for 24 hours

or as per the statutory conditions

by external agency

PM10, PM2.5, SO2,

NOX

3-5 locations

Noise level Monthly as per the

statutory conditions

Noise level 8-10 locations




by external agency

Fugitive emission

monitoring

Monthly by external

agency

Dust 10-12 locations

Health check-up

of workers

As per the statutory

guideline

All workers

11.5 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

11.5.1 Risk Assessment

Raw material and products are in solid form and non-hazardous nature

and will be stored in separate area and required safety measures will be

provided. Necessary safety measures including integral safety devices,

fire-fighting facilities will be provided to attend any emergency arising

due to plant operation.

11.6 PROJECT BENEFITS

Proposed project has a potential for employment of skilled, semi-skilled &

unskilled employees. The direct employment potential is estimated as

500-700 persons and many others will be indirectly employed. Indirectly,

the proposed project will help the Government by paying different taxes

from time to time, which is a part of revenue and thus, will help in

developing the area. The company has allocated a budget of Rs. 5.22

Crore for socio-economy activities, which can lead to improve social

infrastructure.

11.7 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

EMP includes the protection & mitigation measures to be implemented to

reduce the adverse impact on the environment. Management plan of

impacts identified is detailed below:

Air Pollution Management

The flue gases from the Pellet plant will be controlled by Bag Filters and

then discharged into the atmosphere through stack of 31.0 m height. Flue

gases from Rotary kiln of DRI plant will be passed through Electro Static

Precipitators (ESPs) and then discharged into the atmosphere through

stack of 48.0 m height. Flue gases from DRI plant will be passed through

Waste Heat Recovery Boiler and after heat recovery; the gases will be

treated in High efficiency ESPs to bring down the particulate emission in

the exhaust gases to below 30 mg/Nm3 and then discharged into the




atmosphere through stack of 75.0 m height. The fugitive emissions from

the Induction furnaces will be sucked through hoods and will pass

through a fume extraction system with bag filters and then the treated

gases will be discharged into the atmosphere through 4 nos. of stacks

each of 30.0 m height for effective dispersion of emissions from Induction

Furnaces. The outlet dust emission in the exhaust gases will be less than

50 mg/Nm3. The dust will be pneumatically carried to covered bins.

The flue gases from the FBC boiler will be treated in a high efficiency ESP

to bring down the particulate emission to less than 30 mg/Nm3 and will

be discharged through a stack of 30.0 m height for effective dispersion of

emissions into the atmosphere.

Furthermore, facility for sampling such as ladder, platform, and sampling

point will be provided as per the GPCB guidelines.

To control the fugitive emissions, unit will adopt following mitigation

measures.

Dust suppression system (water sprinklers) will be provided in coal

unloading area,

Dust/gas suction system will be provided to control fugitive

emission generated from melting of scrap,


stack attached with induction furnace,

The Continuous Casting Operation is selected for the production of

billets in SMS,


prevent flying of dust during conveying,

All production shop having high heat emission in them will be

designed for natural ventilation to make use of draft created by the

density difference and selecting effective roof monitors suitable for

this purpose,

All internal roads will be concreted to prevent fugitive dust emission

due to vehicular movement,

PPEs will be provided to the workers,




Electro Static Precipitator will be provided to bring down the PM to

50 mg/Nm3 for DRI plant and 30 mg/Nm3 for Power plant,

Fly ash will be stored in sheds,

Greenbelt will be developed around the plant, and

Frequent work area monitoring will be done ensure fugitive

emission level.

Water Pollution Management

• There will be no wastewater generation from the pellet, DRI, SMS &

Rolling Mill processes, as closed-circuit cooling system will be

provided.

• Only source of wastewater generation will be cooling tower bleed off,

boiler blow down & DM plant regeneration.

• Effluent from power plant will be treated in ETP and after ensuring

compliance with SPCB norms, partly utilized for slag cooling & partly

sent to RO followed by MEE to achieve ZLD.

• Sewage will be treated in Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) and treated

water will be utilized for Greenbelt development.

• Unit will maintain the records for the total water consumption.

• Regular monitoring of working of ETP, RO & MEE.

Solid & Hazardous Waste Management

Hazardous waste Management:







of hazardous waste.

Solid waste Management:

Fly Ash will be sold to brick manufacturing unit. Dolochar will be used in

FBC power plant as fuel/brick manufacturing. Slag after crushing and iron

removal, used in road construction/brick manufacturing. Mill scales will be

reused in the Pellet Plant.




Noise Pollution Management

• Enclosures will be provided to high noise generating machines.

• Acoustic enclosure is provided for D.G. set.

• All the equipment will be designed/operated in such a way that the

noise level in work place shall not exceed 85 dB(A) as per the

requirement of OSHA Standard.

• Periodic maintenance of machinery and vehicles will be undertaken to

reduce the noise impact. • PPEs are provided to the workers working in high noise area.

• Greenbelt will be intensive within premises to prevent the noise

pollution.

• Periodic monitoring of noise levels will be done.

Green Belt Development

Total land area is 153061.0 m2. The unit will develop greenbelt in an area

of 50500 m2. Overall greenbelt area will be tune around 33% of the total

area of the project. Additionally, the unit also has plans to develop the

greenbelt in areas available outside the plant premises, if necessary.

11.8 CONCLUSION

Based on the study it is concluded that-

There will be no major impact on water environment as effluent from

power plant will be treated in ETP. Then, partly utilized for slag cooling

& partly sent to RO followed by MEE to achieve ZLD.

Condensate of MEE and RO permeate will be reused/recycled within

plant premises. Thus, reducing fresh water consumption load by

reuse/recycle treated effluent scheme.

Domestic wastewater will be treated in STP and reused in greenbelt

development.

Bag filters, ESP will be used as pollution control equipments for control

of flue gas emission.

Fume extraction system with bag filters, dust suppression system,

covered conveyers will also be installed to control fugitive emission.

For noise control, unit will provide necessary PPEs like earplugs or

earmuffs to all workers and selection of any new plant equipment will

be made with specification of low noise levels.




Entire quantity of hazardous waste will be handled and disposed as per

Hazardous & Other Waste (Management & Transboundary Movement)

Rules, 2016.

Greenbelt will be developed in 33% of the total area.

Fire protection and safety measures will be provided.

Direct and indirect employment opportunities will have positive

impact.




Chapter-12

Disclosure of Consultant engaged

1. Brief about San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd.

San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd. (SEPL) has been appointed by Genext Steels Pvt.

Ltd. to carry out this Environmental Impact Assessment Study as per the

EIA notification, 2006 as amended till date. SEPL is accredited as Category-

A organization under the QCI-NABET Scheme for accreditation of EIA

consultant Organizations: Version 3 for preparing EIA-EMP reports in 10

sectors (Certificate No. NABET/EIA/1619/RA0084; Valid till

23.12.2019).

San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd. has started its work in 1990 to serve the

environment as a trustee of next generation with a small infrastructure

under the dynamic leadership of Dr. Mahendra Sadaria. SEPL has wide

spectrum of national and multinational clients covering the industries - Bulk

Drugs and Pharmaceuticals, Dyes and Dye Intermediates, Pesticides,

Fertilizers, Chemicals, Cement, Mining, and Infrastructure. During last two

decades, SEPL has been taking care of client’s unique problems and

concerns in order to develop cost effective strategies to meet their

regulatory obligations. SEPL focuses on strategic planning and

comprehensive solutions to address both short and long term needs of the

clients.

SEPL has in-house multi-disciplinary analytical testing laboratory that is

MoEFCC approved under EP Act. SEPL is also a recognized schedule-II

Environmental Auditor appointed by Gujarat Pollution Control Board as per

the directives of the Honorable High Court of Gujarat. SEPL is also an ISO

9001:2008, 14001:2008 and OHSAS 18001 certified company. SEPL team

consists of qualified & experienced personnel. Experts involved in the

preparation of this EIA/EMP report are given in EIA report as ‘declaration by

experts’.




2. Brief resume and Nature of Consultancy Rendered by Shivalik Solid

Waste Management Limited

Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited (SSWML), Himachal Pradesh is an

offshoot of UPL Limited group of companies – Mumbai. UPL Limited is one of

the leading players in the field of Environmental Services in the country.

Environment Impact Assessment Services

SSWML is accredited EIA Consultant under accreditation scheme of National

Accreditation Board for Education & Training (NABET) (Certificate No.

NABET/EIA/1619/RA0040, Valid till 16.02.2019).

Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited (SSWML), operating their business

at Zirakpur, Punjab is offering high quality technical services in the field of

EIA, Environment, Health & Safety (EHS), and Environmental Monitoring &

Laboratory Analytical Services etc. SSWML is supported by distinguished

professionals, engineers, scientists etc. SSWML Professionals have excellent

experience in executing EIA and other environmental projects.

For Environmental Monitoring related work SSWML has in-house laboratory

approved by NABL. The following experts are associated with SSWML for EIA

and Environmental projects. The following experts are associated with

SSWML for EIA and Environmental projects.

SSWML is accredited in following sectors:

Mining of minerals

River Valley, Hydel, Drainage and Irrigation projects

Thermal power plants

Metallurgical Industries (ferrous & non-ferrous) – both primary &

secondary

Pesticide industry and pesticide specific intermediates

Oil & Gas transportation pipeline

Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, storage & disposal facilities

(TSDFs)

Common Biomedical Waste Treatment Facilities (CBWTFs)

Common Effluent Treatment Plants (CETPs)

Building and large construction projects

Synthetic Organic chemical industry




Isolated storage & handling of hazardous chemicals

Certifications, Recognition & Accreditation obtained

QCI-NABET Accredited EIA consultant

MoEF&CC recognized Environmental Consultant

MoEF&CC approved laboratory

NABL accredited laboratory as per ISO/IEC 17025:2005

ISO 9001:2008, ISO 14001:2004 & OHSAS 18001: 2007 Certified

Organization

Services

Environment Impact Assessment for obtaining Environmental

Clearance

Social Impact Assessment


Preparation of Mining Plan

Environmental Monitoring

Ecological and biodiversity Studies

Resettlement & Rehabilitation Action Plan

Environment Due Diligence

Compliance to the conditions of Environmental Clearance

Environment Audit

This EIA study is carried out by joint efforts of SEPL & SSWML. Technical

experts involved in EIA study is incorporated in declaration of experts.